Nokia Solutions and Networks T6ER1 SC4812ETLite 1.9 GHz 1X/EVDO User Manual

Nokia Solutions and Networks SC4812ETLite 1.9 GHz 1X/EVDO Users Manual

Users Manual

Download: Nokia Solutions and Networks T6ER1 SC4812ETLite 1.9 GHz 1X/EVDO User Manual
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]Nokia Solutions and Networks T6ER1 SC4812ETLite 1.9 GHz 1X/EVDO User Manual
Document ID498554
Application IDtK7OA4vz9tBqaJOP7WjCcw==
Document DescriptionUsers Manual
Short Term ConfidentialNo
Permanent ConfidentialNo
SupercedeNo
Document TypeUser Manual
Display FormatAdobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize205.68kB (2570961 bits)
Date Submitted2004-12-20 00:00:00
Date Available2004-12-17 00:00:00
Creation Date2001-08-02 14:09:50
Producing SoftwareAcrobat Distiller 4.0 for Windows
Document Lastmod2001-08-02 14:23:42
Document TitleUsers Manual

1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS
Optimization/ATP
Software Release 2.16.0.x and CDMA LMF Build 2.16.x.x
800 MHz and 1.9 GHz
CDMA
English
08/01/2001
68P09253A60–1
PRELIMINARY
Notice
While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola, Inc. assumes no liability resulting from any
inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from use of the information obtained herein. The information in this document has been
carefully checked and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies or omissions. Motorola,
Inc. reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein and reserves the right to revise this document and to make
changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes. Motorola, Inc. does not
assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product, software, or circuit described herein; neither does it convey
license under its patent rights or the rights of others.
It is possible that this publication may contain references to, or information about Motorola products (machines and programs),
programming, or services that are not announced in your country. Such references or information must not be construed to mean
that Motorola intends to announce such Motorola products, programming, or services in your country.
Copyrights
This instruction manual, and the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may be, include or describe copyrighted
Motorola material, such as computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and
other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted material, including the exclusive right to copy,
reproduce in any form, distribute and make derivative works of the copyrighted material. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola
material contained herein or in the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may not be copied, reproduced,
distributed, merged or modified in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of
Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the
copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, as arises by operation of law in the sale of a product.
Usage and Disclosure Restrictions
License Agreement
The software described in this document is the property of Motorola, Inc. It is furnished by express license agreement only and may
be used only in accordance with the terms of such an agreement.
Copyrighted Materials
Software and documentation are copyrighted materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No part of the software or
documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or
computer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission of Motorola, Inc.
High Risk Activities
Components, units, or third–party products used in the product described herein are NOT fault–tolerant and are NOT designed,
manufactured, or intended for use as on–line control equipment in the following hazardous environments requiring fail–safe
controls: the operation of Nuclear Facilities, Aircraft Navigation or Aircraft Communication Systems, Air Traffic Control, Life
Support, or Weapons Systems (“High Risk Activities”). Motorola and its supplier(s) specifically disclaim any expressed or implied
warranty of fitness for such High Risk Activities.
Trademarks
and Motorola are registered trademarks of Motorola, Inc.
Product and service names profiled herein are trademarks of Motorola, Inc. Other manufacturers’ products or services profiled
herein may be referred to by trademarks of their respective companies.
Copyright
 Copyright 2001 Motorola, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
Printed on
Recyclable Paper
REV012501
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
FOA
Table of Contents
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Software Release 2.16.0.x and CDMA LMF Build 2.16.x.x
List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv
List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vii
Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xii
FCC Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xv
General Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xviii
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xx
Patent Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxi
Chapter 1: Introduction
Optimization Manual Scope and Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
Purpose of the Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3
When to Optimize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4
Required Test Equipment and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5
Required Documents and Related Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-12
Terms and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-13
BTS Equipment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-15
Cabinet Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-17
Internal Assembly Location and Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-18
BTS Sector Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-26
Chapter 2: Preliminary Operations
Preliminary Operations: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
Ethernet LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
Initial Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4
Chapter 3: Optimization/Calibration
08/01/2001
Optimization/Calibration – Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
Preparing the LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4
Span Lines – Interface and Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-14
LMF to BTS Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-20
Using CDMA LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-21
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table of Contents – continued
Pinging the Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-28
Download the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-31
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-37
Test Equipment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-47
Test Set Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-55
Bay Level Offset Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-64
RFDS Setup and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-76
Alarms Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-85
Chapter 4: Automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP)
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure – Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
Acceptance Tests – Test Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4
Individual Acceptance Tests–Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9
TX Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-15
RX FER Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-18
Generating an ATP Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-20
Chapter 5: Leaving the Site
Updating Calibration Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
Prepare to Leave the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3
Chapter 6: Basic Troubleshooting
ii
Basic Troubleshooting Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
Troubleshooting: Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
Troubleshooting: Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7
Troubleshooting: Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10
Basic Troubleshooting – RF Path Fault Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15
Troubleshooting: Receive ATP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-17
Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-18
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-20
RFDS – Fault Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-26
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-28
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-35
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Table of Contents – continued
Appendix A: Data Sheets
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
Site Serial Number Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-13
Appendix B: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1
Appendix C: BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations
BBX2 Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-1
Appendix D: CDMA Operating Frequency Information
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American PCS Bands .
D-1
Appendix E: PN Offset/I & Q Offset Register Programming Information
PN Offset Programming Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-1
Appendix F: Test Equipment Preparation
Test Equipment Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-1
Manual Cable Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-14
Appendix G: Download ROM Code
Downloading ROM Code with the LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-1
Appendix H: In–Service Calibration
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-1
Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-3
In–Service Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-18
Index
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
iii
List of Figures
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Software Release 2.16.0.x and CDMA LMF Build 2.16.x.x
iv
Figure 1-1: SC4812ET Lite Logical BTS Span Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-16
Figure 1-2: SC4812ET Lite BTS Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-17
Figure 1-3: Internal Assemblies and FRUs
(Cabinet doors not shown for clarity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-18
Figure 1-4: 50–Pair Punchblock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-20
Figure 1-5: SCCP Shelf, IS–95A/B and 1X Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-22
Figure 1-6: RF Interface Panel, DRDCs Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-23
Figure 1-7: RF Interface Panel, TRDCs Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-24
Figure 1-8: RFDS, DRDC, and TRDC Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-25
Figure 1-9: SC4812ET Lite LPA Configuration with Bandpass Filters
(Starter Frame Mapping Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-27
Figure 2-1: Backplane DIP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
Figure 2-2: External Ethernet LAN Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
Figure 2-3: Frame Power Subassemblies, North American and
International Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5
Figure 2-4: ACLC Circuit Breaker Panel – North American . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6
Figure 2-5: ACLC Circuit Breaker Panel – International . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6
Figure 2-6: DC PDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7
Figure 2-7: ACLC Voltage Measurement Probe Points – North American . . . .
2-11
Figure 2-8: ACLC Voltage Measurement Probe Points – International . . . . . . .
2-12
Figure 2-9: Meter Alarm Panel (MAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-13
Figure 2-10: Heat Exchanger Blower Assembly and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . .
2-18
Figure 3-1: CDMA LMF Folder Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9
Figure 3-2: BTS Folder Name Syntax Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10
Figure 3-3: CAL File Name Syntax Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10
Figure 3-4: CDF Name Syntax Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10
Figure 3-5: Code Load File Name Syntax Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-12
Figure 3-6: DDS File Name Syntax Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-13
Figure 3-7: Disconnecting Span Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-14
Figure 3-8: Rear and Front View of CSU Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-16
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
List of Figures – continued
08/01/2001
Figure 3-9: 50–Pair Punchblock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-17
Figure 3-10: LMF Connection Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-20
Figure 3-11: CDMA LMF Computer Common MMI Connections . . . . . . . . . .
3-27
Figure 3-12: BTS Ethernet LAN Interconnect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-28
Figure 3-13: CSM MMI Terminal Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-40
Figure 3-14: Cable Calibration Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-50
Figure 3-15: TX Calibration Test Setup (CyberTest and HP 8935) . . . . . . . . . .
3-51
Figure 3-16: TX Calibration Test Setup HP 8921A and Advantest . . . . . . . . . .
3-52
Figure 3-17: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Calibration (CyberTest, HP 8935 and
Advantest) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-53
Figure 3-18: Optimization/ATP Test Setup HP 8921A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-54
Figure 3-19: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for TX Cable Calibration
(Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-60
Figure 3-20: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for RX ATP Test
(Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-61
Figure 3-21: Battery Over–Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-92
Figure 3-22: MAP Connector J8 (Rear of MAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-93
Figure 4-1: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11
Figure 4-2: Code Domain Analyzer CD Power/Noise Floor Display Examples
4-17
Figure 6-1: TX Output Fault Isolation Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-14
Figure 6-2: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-29
Figure 6-3: GLI2 Front Panel Operating Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-32
Figure 6-4: MCC24 Front Panel LEDs and LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-34
Figure 6-5: MGLI/GLI Board MMI Connection Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-36
Figure D-1: North America PCS Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation) . . .
D-1
Figure D-2: North American Cellular Telephone System Frequency Spectrum
(CDMA Allocation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-4
Figure F-1: HP8921A/600 Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal
and GPIB without Rubidium Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-2
Figure F-2: HP8921A Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB
with Rubidium Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-4
Figure F-3: Cable Connections for Test Set without 10 MHz Rubidium
Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-7
Figure F-4: Cable Connections for Test Set with 10 MHz
Rubidium Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-8
Figure F-5: Power Meter Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-10
Figure F-6: Gigatronics 8542C Power Meter Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-13
Figure F-7: Cable Calibration Using HP8921 with PCS Interface . . . . . . . . . . .
F-17
Figure F-8: Cable Calibration Using Advantest R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-20
Figure H-1: Delta Calibration Setup – Agilent E4432B to HP437 . . . . . . . . . .
H-5
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
List of Figures – continued
vi
Figure H-2: Delta Calibration Setup – Agilent E4432B to Agilent E4406A . . .
H-5
Figure H-3: Delta Calibration Setup – Advantest R3562 to HP437 . . . . . . . . .
H-8
Figure H-4: Delta Calibration Setup – Advantest R3562 to R3267 . . . . . . . . . .
H-8
Figure H-5: Delta Calibration Setup – E6380A to HP437 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-10
Figure H-6: Delta Calibration Setup – E6380A to E6380A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-11
Figure H-7: Delta Calibration Setup – HP8921A to HP437 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-13
Figure H-8: Delta Calibration Setup – HP8921A to HP8921A . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-14
Figure H-9: Delta Calibration Setup – R3561L to HP437 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-17
Figure H-10: Delta Calibration Setup – R3561L to R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-17
Figure H-11: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using Directional Coupler –
Agilent Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-20
Figure H-12: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using Directional Coupler –
Advantest R3267/R3562 Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-21
Figure H-13: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS –
Agilent Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-22
Figure H-14: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS –
Advantest R3267/R3562 Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-23
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
List of Tables
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Software Release 2.16.0.x and CDMA LMF Build 2.16.x.x
08/01/2001
Table 1-1: Non–Standard Terms and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-13
Table 1-2: SCCP Cage Module Device ID Numbers (Top Shelf) . . . . . . . . . . .
1-16
Table 1-3: SCCP Cage Module Device ID Numbers (Bottom Shelf) . . . . . . . .
1-16
Table 1-4: BTS Sector Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-26
Table 1-5: Sector Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-27
Table 2-1: Initial Installation of Boards/Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
Table 2-2: Initial Inspection and Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4
Table 2-3: DC Power System Pre–Power Application Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7
Table 2-4: AC Voltage Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-9
Table 2-5: Applying Internal AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-12
Table 2-6: DC Power Application and Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-14
Table 2-7: Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-15
Table 2-8: Battery Discharge Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-16
Table 2-9: Power Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-17
Table 3-1: CD ROM Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4
Table 3-2: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMF Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
Table 3-3: Create HyperTerminal Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7
Table 3-4: T1/E1 Span Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-15
Table 3-5: Punchdown Location for 50–Pair Punch Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-18
Table 3-6: Connect the LMF to the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-20
Table 3-7: BTS GUI Login Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-23
Table 3-8: BTS CLI Login Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-24
Table 3-9: BTS GUI Logout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-25
Table 3-10: BTS CLI Logout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-26
Table 3-11: Establishing MMI Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-26
Table 3-12: Pinging the Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-29
Table 3-13: Verify GLI ROM Code Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-32
Table 3-14: Download and Enable MGLI and GLI Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-33
Table 3-15: Download RAM Code and Data to Non–GLI Devices . . . . . . . . . .
3-34
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
vii
List of Tables
viii
– continued
Table 3-16: Select CSM Clock Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-34
Table 3-17: Enable CSMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-35
Table 3-18: Enable MCCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-36
Table 3-19: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification) . . . . . . . . .
3-39
Table 3-20: GPS Initialization/Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-41
Table 3-21: LORAN–C Initialization/Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-45
Table 3-22: Test Equipment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-48
Table 3-23: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection Tab . .
3-56
Table 3-24: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-Detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-57
Table 3-25: Test Equipment Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-58
Table 3-26: Cable Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-59
Table 3-27: Calibrating TX Cables Using Signal Generator and
Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-60
Table 3-28: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and
Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-61
Table 3-29: Setting Cable Loss Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-62
Table 3-30: Setting TX Coupler Loss Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-63
Table 3-31: BLO BTS.cal file Array Branch Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-66
Table 3-32: SC4812ET Lite BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-67
Table 3-33: Set Up Test Equipment (RF Path Calibration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-68
Table 3-34: All Cal/Audit Path Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-71
Table 3-35: TX Calibration Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-71
Table 3-36: Download BLO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-73
Table 3-37: TX Path Audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-74
Table 3-38: Create CAL File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-75
Table 3-39: RFDS Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-77
Table 3-40: Definition of Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-78
Table 3-41: Valid NAM Field Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-79
Table 3-42: Set Antenna Map Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-80
Table 3-43: Set RFDS Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-81
Table 3-44: RFDS TSIC Calibration Channel Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-82
Table 3-45: RFDS Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-83
Table 3-46: Program NAM Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-84
Table 3-47: Alarm Testing Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-86
Table 3-48: Heat Exchanger Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-86
Table 3-49: ACLC and Power Entry Door Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-86
Table 3-50: AC Fail Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-87
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
List of Tables – continued
08/01/2001
Table 3-51: Minor Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-87
Table 3-52: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor Alarm, Single–Carrier System . . . .
3-88
Table 3-53: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm, Single–Carrier System
3-88
Table 3-54: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor Alarm, Two–Carrier System . . . . . .
3-89
Table 3-55: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm, Two–Carrier System .
3-90
Table 3-56: Battery Over–Temperature Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-90
Table 3-57: Rectifier Over–Temperature Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-93
Table 4-1: Set Up Test Equipment – TX Output Verify/Control Tests . . . . . . . .
4-3
Table 4-2: All TX/RX ATP Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5
Table 4-3: All TX ATP Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5
Table 4-4: All RX ATP Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6
Table 4-5: Test Spectral Purity Transmit Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10
Table 4-6: Test Waveform Quality (Rho) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12
Table 4-7: Test Pilot Time Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13
Table 4-8: Test Code Domain Power/Noise Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-16
Table 4-9: Test FER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-19
Table 4-10: Generating an ATP Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-20
Table 5-1: Copying CAL Files to a Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
Table 5-2: Copying CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
Table 5-3: Remove External Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3
Table 5-4: Reset BTS Devices and Remote Site Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3
Table 5-5: Bring Modules into Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4
Table 5-6: Remove LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4
Table 5-7: Connect T1 or E1 Spans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5
Table 5-8: Check Before Leaving the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5
Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
Table 6-2: Force Ethernet LAN A to Active State as Primary LAN . . . . . . . . .
6-2
Table 6-3: GLI IP Address Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
Table 6-4: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure . . . . . . . . .
6-5
Table 6-5: Troubleshooting a Communications Analyzer
Communication Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6
Table 6-6: Troubleshooting Code Download Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7
Table 6-7: Troubleshooting Data Download Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7
Table 6-8: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8
Table 6-9: LPA Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9
Table 6-10: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10
Table 6-11: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
ix
List of Tables
– continued
Table 6-12: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15
Table 6-13: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure
6-15
Table 6-14: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor
Measurement Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-16
Table 6-15: Troubleshooting Carrier Measurement Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-16
Table 6-16: Troubleshooting Multi-FER Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-17
Table 6-17: No GLI2 Control via LMF (all GLI2s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-21
Table 6-18: No GLI2 Control through Span Line Connection (Both GLI2s) . .
6-22
Table 6-19: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over Co–located GLI2 . . . . .
6-22
Table 6-20: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over AMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-22
Table 6-21: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over Co–located BBX2s . . . .
6-23
Table 6-22: BBX2 Control Good – No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic . . . . . . .
6-23
Table 6-23: No MCC24/MCC8E Channel Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-23
Table 6-24: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-24
Table 6-25: No DC Input Voltage to any SCCP Shelf Module . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-25
Table 6-26: TX and RX Signal Routing Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-25
Table 6-27: RFDS Fault Isolation – All tests fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-26
Table 6-28: RFDS Fault Isolation – All tests fail on single antenna path . . . . .
6-26
Table 6-29: Troubleshoot Control Link Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-35
Table 6-30: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-37
Table A-1: Verification of Test Equipment Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
Table A-2: Site Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-2
Table A-3: Preliminary Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-2
Table A-4: GPS Receiver Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-5
Table A-5: LFR Receiver Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-6
Table A-6: LPA IM Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-7
Table A-7: TX BLO Calibration (3–Sector: 1–Carrier and 2–Carrier
Non–adjacent Channels) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-8
Table A-8: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3–Sector: 2–Carrier
Adjacent Channels) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-9
Table A-9: TX Antenna VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-10
Table A-10: RX Antenna VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-11
Table A-11: CDI Alarm Input Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-11
Table B-1: When RF Optimization Is required on the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1
Table B-2: When to Optimize Inter–frame Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1
Table B-3: SC 4812ET Lite BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix . . . . . . . .
B-3
Table C-1: BBX2 Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm) . . . . . . . . .
C-1
Table D-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-2
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
List of Tables – continued
08/01/2001
Table D-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-4
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-3
Table F-1: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel
Connections Without Rubidium Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-1
Table F-2: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel
Connections With Rubidium Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-3
Table F-3: System Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-5
Table F-4: Setting HP8921A GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-6
Table F-5: Pretest Setup for HP8921A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-6
Table F-6: Pretest Setup for HP8935 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-6
Table F-7: Advantest R3465 GPIB Address and Clock Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-9
Table F-8: Pretest Setup for Advantest R346 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-9
Table F-9: Power Meter Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-10
Table F-10: Calibrate Gigatronics 8542 Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-12
Table F-11: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface) . . . . . .
F-14
Table F-12: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using
Advantest R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-18
Table G-1: Download ROM and RAM Code to Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-2
Table H-1: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-3
Table H-2: Advantest R3267 Power Delta Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . .
H-6
Table H-3: Agilent E6380A Power Delta Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-9
Table H-4: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-12
Table H-5: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-15
Table H-6: In–Service Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-24
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
xi
Foreword
Scope of manual
This manual is intended for use by cellular telephone system
craftspersons in the day-to-day operation of Motorola cellular system
equipment and ancillary devices. It is assumed that the user of this
information has a general understanding of telephony, as used in the
operation of the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN), and is
familiar with these concepts as they are applied in the cellular
mobile/portable radiotelephone environment. The user, however, is not
expected to have any detailed technical knowledge of the internal
operation of the equipment.
This document covers only the steps required to verify the functionality
of the RF Base Transceiver Subsystem (BTS) equipment prior to system
level testing, and is intended to supplement site specific application
instructions. It also should be used in conjunction with existing product
manuals. Additional steps may be required.
This manual is not intended to replace the system and equipment
training offered by Motorola, although it can be used to supplement or
enhance the knowledge gained through such training.
Text conventions
The following special paragraphs are used in this manual to point out
information that must be read. This information may be set-off from the
surrounding text, but is always preceded by a bold title in capital letters.
The four categories of these special paragraphs are:
NOTE
Presents additional, helpful, non-critical information that
you can use.
IMPORTANT
Presents information to help you avoid an undesirable
situation or provides additional information to help you
understand a topic or concept.
CAUTION
Presents information to identify a situation in which
equipment damage could occur, thus avoiding damage to
equipment.
WARNING
Presents information to warn you of a potentially
hazardous situation in which there is a possibility of
personal injury.
xii
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Foreword – continued
The following special paragraphs are used in tables in the manual to
point out information that must be read.
NOTE
Presents additional, helpful non-critical information that you can use.
* IMPORTANT
Presents information to help you avoid an undesirable situation or
provide additional information to help you understand a topic or
concept.
! CAUTION
Presents information to identify a situation where equipment damage
could occur and help you avoid damaging your equipment.
n WARNING
Presents information to warn you of a potentially hazardous situation
where there is a possibility of personal injury (serious or otherwise).
Changes to manual
Changes that occur after the printing date are incorporated into your
manual by Cellular Manual Revisions (CMRs). The information in this
manual is updated, as required, by a CMR when new options and
procedures become available for general use or when engineering
changes occur. The cover sheet(s) that accompany each CMR should be
retained for future reference. Refer to the Revision History page for a list
of all applicable CMRs contained in this manual.
Receiving updates
Technical Education & Documentation (TED) maintains a customer
database that reflects the type and number of manuals ordered or shipped
since the original delivery of your Motorola equipment. Also identified
in this database is a “key” individual (such as Documentation
Coordinator or Facility Librarian) designated to receive manual updates
from TED as they are released.
To ensure that your facility receives updates to your manuals, it is
important that the information in our database is correct and up-to-date.
Therefore, if you have corrections or wish to make changes to the
information in our database (i.e., to assign a new “key” individual),
please contact Technical Education & Documentation at:
MOTOROLA, INC.
Technical Education & Documentation
1 Nelson C. White Parkway
Mundelein, Illinois 60060
U.S.A.
Phone:
Within U.S.A. and Canada . . . . . 800-872-8225
Outside of U.S.A. and Canada . . +1-847-435–5700
FAX: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +1-847-435–5541
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
xiii
Foreword – continued
Reporting manual errors
In the event that you locate an error or identify a deficiency in your
manual, please take time to write to us at the address above. Be sure to
include your name and address, the complete manual title and part
number (located on the manual spine, cover, or title page), the page
number (found at the bottom of each page) where the error is located,
and any comments you may have regarding what you have found. We
appreciate any comments from the users of our manuals.
xiv
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
FCC Requirements
Content
This section presents Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules Parts 15 and 68 requirements and compliance information for the
SCt4812T/ET/ET Lite series RF Base Transceiver Stations (BTS).
FCC Part 15 Requirements
Part 15.19a(3) – INFORMATION TO USER
NOTE
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Part 15.21 – INFORMATION TO USER
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
Motorola could void your authority to operate the
equipment.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
xv
FCC Requirements
– continued
15.105(b) – INFORMATION TO USER
NOTE
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However,
there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment OFF and ON, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one
or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician
for help.
FCC Part 68 Requirements
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules. A label inside the cabinet frame easily visible
with the door open in the upper portion of the cabinet contains, among
other information, the FCC Registration Number and Ringer
Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment. If requested, this
information must be provided to the telephone company.
The REN is useful to determine the quantity of the devices which may
connect to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may
result in the devices not ringing in response to incoming calls. In most,
but not all areas, the sum of the RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To
be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line as
determined by the total RENs, contact the telephone company to
determine the maximum REN for the calling area.
If the dial–in site access modem causes harm to the telephone network,
the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary
discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not
practical, the telephone company will notify you of the discontinuance as
soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a
complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment,
operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of your dial–in
xvi
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
FCC Requirements
– continued
site access modem. If this happens, the telephone company will provide
advance notice so that you can modify your equipment as required to
maintain uninterrupted service.
If you experience trouble with the dial–in site access modem, please
contact:
Global Customer Network Resolution Center (CNRC)
1501 W. Shure Drive, 3436N
Arlington Heights, Illinois 60004
Phone Number: (847) 632–5390
for repair and/or warranty information. If the trouble is causing harm to
the telephone network, the telephone company may request you to
disconnect the equipment from the network until the problem is solved.
You should not attempt to repair this equipment yourself. This
equipment contains no customer or user–serviceable parts.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Motorola could
void your authority to operate this equipment.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
xvii
General Safety
Remember! . . . Safety
depends on you!!
The following general safety precautions must be observed during all
phases of operation, service, and repair of the equipment described in
this manual. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific
warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design,
manufacture, and intended use of the equipment. Motorola, Inc. assumes
no liability for the customer’s failure to comply with these requirements.
The safety precautions listed below represent warnings of certain dangers
of which we are aware. You, as the user of this product, should follow
these warnings and all other safety precautions necessary for the safe
operation of the equipment in your operating environment.
Ground the instrument
To minimize shock hazard, the equipment chassis and enclosure must be
connected to an electrical ground. If the equipment is supplied with a
three-conductor ac power cable, the power cable must be either plugged
into an approved three-contact electrical outlet or used with a
three-contact to two-contact adapter. The three-contact to two-contact
adapter must have the grounding wire (green) firmly connected to an
electrical ground (safety ground) at the power outlet. The power jack and
mating plug of the power cable must meet International Electrotechnical
Commission (IEC) safety standards.
Do not operate in an explosive
atmosphere
Do not operate the equipment in the presence of flammable gases or
fumes. Operation of any electrical equipment in such an environment
constitutes a definite safety hazard.
Keep away from live circuits
Operating personnel must:
S not remove equipment covers. Only Factory Authorized Service
Personnel or other qualified maintenance personnel may remove
equipment covers for internal subassembly, or component
replacement, or any internal adjustment.
S not replace components with power cable connected. Under certain
conditions, dangerous voltages may exist even with the power cable
removed.
S always disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching them.
Do not service or adjust alone
Do not attempt internal service or adjustment, unless another person,
capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation, is present.
xviii
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
General Safety – continued
Use caution when exposing or
handling the CRT
Breakage of the Cathode–Ray Tube (CRT) causes a high-velocity
scattering of glass fragments (implosion). To prevent CRT implosion,
avoid rough handling or jarring of the equipment. The CRT should be
handled only by qualified maintenance personnel, using approved safety
mask and gloves.
Do not substitute parts or
modify equipment
Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install
substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification of equipment.
Contact Motorola Warranty and Repair for service and repair to ensure
that safety features are maintained.
Dangerous procedure
warnings
Warnings, such as the example below, precede potentially dangerous
procedures throughout this manual. Instructions contained in the
warnings must be followed. You should also employ all other safety
precautions that you deem necessary for the operation of the equipment
in your operating environment.
WARNING
Dangerous voltages, capable of causing death, are present in this
equipment. Use extreme caution when handling, testing, and
adjusting .
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
xix
Revision History
Manual Number
68P09253A60
Manual Title
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Software Release 2.16.0.x and CDMA LMF Build 2.16.x.x
Version Information
The following table lists the manual version, date of version, and
remarks on the version.
xx
Version
Level
Date of
Issue
08/2/2001
Remarks
Preliminary version of manual for R2.16.0 1X BTS
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Patent Notification
Patent numbers
This product is manufactured and/or operated under one or more of the
following patents and other patents pending:
4128740
4193036
4237534
4268722
4282493
4301531
4302845
4312074
4350958
4354248
4367443
4369516
4369520
4369522
4375622
4485486
4491972
4517561
4519096
4549311
4550426
4564821
4573017
4581602
4590473
4591851
4616314
4636791
4644351
4646038
4649543
4654655
4654867
08/01/2001
4661790
4667172
4672657
4694484
4696027
4704734
4709344
4710724
4726050
4729531
4737978
4742514
4751725
4754450
4764737
4764849
4775998
4775999
4797947
4799253
4802236
4803726
4811377
4811380
4811404
4817157
4827507
4829543
4833701
4837800
4843633
4847869
4852090
4860281
4866710
4870686
4872204
4873683
4876740
4881082
4885553
4887050
4887265
4893327
4896361
4910470
4914696
4918732
4941203
4945570
4956854
4970475
4972355
4972432
4979207
4984219
4984290
4992753
4998289
5020076
5021801
5022054
5023900
5028885
5030793
5031193
5036515
5036531
5038399
5040127
5041699
5047762
5048116
5055800
5055802
5058136
5060227
5060265
5065408
5067139
5068625
5070310
5073909
5073971
5075651
5077532
5077741
5077757
5081641
5083304
5090051
5093632
5095500
5105435
5111454
5111478
5113400
5117441
5119040
5119508
5121414
5123014
5127040
5127100
5128959
5130663
5133010
5140286
5142551
5142696
5144644
5146609
5146610
5152007
5155448
5157693
5159283
5159593
5159608
5170392
5170485
5170492
5182749
5184349
5185739
5187809
5187811
5193102
5195108
5200655
5203010
5204874
5204876
5204977
5207491
5210771
5212815
5212826
5214675
5214774
5216692
5218630
5220936
5222078
5222123
5222141
5222251
5224121
5224122
5226058
5228029
5230007
5233633
5235612
5235614
5239294
5239675
5241545
5241548
5241650
5241688
5243653
5245611
5245629
5245634
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
5247544
5251233
5255292
5257398
5259021
5261119
5263047
5263052
5263055
5265122
5268933
5271042
5274844
5274845
5276685
5276707
5276906
5276907
5276911
5276913
5276915
5278871
5280630
5285447
5287544
5287556
5289505
5291475
5295136
5297161
5299228
5301056
5301188
5301353
5301365
5303240
5303289
5303407
5305468
5307022
5307512
5309443
5309503
5311143
5311176
5311571
5313489
5319712
5321705
5321737
5323391
5325394
5327575
5329547
5329635
5339337
D337328
D342249
D342250
D347004
D349689
RE31814
PRELIMINARY
xxi
Patent Notification – continued
Notes
xxii
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1
Chapter 1: Introduction
Table of Contents
08/01/2001
Optimization Manual Scope and Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Scope and Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assumptions and Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Document Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-2
Purpose of the Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why Optimize? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Is Optimization? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Happens During Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3
1-3
1-3
1-3
When to Optimize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Periodic Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repaired Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
Required Test Equipment and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Cable Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Warm–up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Test Equipment and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5
1-5
1-5
1-5
1-5
1-6
1-10
Required Documents and Related Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-12
1-12
1-12
Terms and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard and Non–standard Terms and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-13
1-13
BTS Equipment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logical BTS Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-15
1-15
1-15
Cabinet Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Major Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-17
1-17
Internal Assembly Location and Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Assemblies and FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCCP Cage Configuration and the 1X Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-18
1-18
1-26
BTS Sector Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sector Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-27
1-27
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
1
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Optimization Manual Scope and Layout
Manual Scope and Layout
This document provides information pertaining to the optimization and
audit tests of the Motorola SC4812ET Lite RF Base Transceiver Station
(BTS) equipment frame and its associated internal and external
interfaces. The following subjects are addressed: preliminary background
information; optimization, and alarm/redundancy tests; Acceptance Test
Procedures (ATP) to verify site operation and regulation compliance; site
turnover; troubleshooting.
Most applications use the same test procedure for all equipment
variations. However, decision break points are provided throughout the
procedure when equipment–specific tests are required. For example,
when tests using external test equipment are performed instead of those
using the RFDS, additional test procedures and illustrations are provided
to cover both applications.
This optimization procedure consists of a group of task-oriented tests.
Each major test category (Audit, Initial power–up, Calibration tests, etc.)
is described in chapters which are broken down into multi-page “maps.”
Each “map” typically consists of pages containing all the information
necessary to perform the test (including all required input levels, output
levels, CDMA Local Maintenance Facility (CDMA LMF) commands,
and test points required). Also described are some of the main concepts
you must understand in the test process. Whenever possible, graphics,
flowcharts, or other examples complement the information/steps.
Assumptions and Prerequisites
This document assumes that the BTS frames and cabling have been
installed per the Frame Mounting Guide Analog/CDMA/TDMA;
68P09226A18, which covers the physical “bolt down” of all SC series
equipment frames, and the SC4812ET Lite Installation; 68P09253A36,
which covers BTS–specific cabling configurations.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
1-1
1
Optimization Manual Scope and Layout – continued
Document Composition
This document covers the following major areas:
S Introduction, consisting of preliminary background information (such
as component and subassembly locations and frame layouts) to be
considered by the Cellular Field Engineer (CFE) before performing
optimization or tests.
S Preliminary Operations, consisting of jumper configuration of BTS
sub–assemblies, pre–power–up tests, initial application of power to
the BTS equipment frames, and initial power–up tests.
S Optimization/Calibration, consisting of procedures for downloading
all BTS processor boards, test equipment set–up, RF path verification,
BLO calibration and calibration audit, and Radio Frequency
Diagnostic System (RFDS) calibration.
S Acceptance Test Procedures (ATP), consisting of automated ATP tests,
executed by the CDMA LMF, and used to verify all major TX and RX
performance characteristics on all BTS equipment. This chapter also
covers generating an ATP report.
S Prepare to Leave the Site, discussing site turnover after ATP is
completed.
S Basic Troubleshooting, consisting of procedures to perform when an
ATP fails, as well as when incorrect results are obtained during logon,
test equipment operation, calibration, and GPS operation.
S Appendices that contain pertinent PN offset, frequency programming,
and output power data tables, along with additional data sheets that are
filled out manually by the CFE at the site.
1-2
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Purpose of the Optimization
Why Optimize?
Proper optimization and calibration ensures that:
S Accurate downlink RF power levels are transmitted from the site.
S Accurate uplink signal strength determinations are made by the site.
What Is Optimization?
Optimization compensates for the site-specific cabling and normal
equipment variations. Site optimization guarantees that the combined
losses of the new cables and the gain/loss characteristics and built-in
tolerances of each BTS frame do not accumulate and cause improper site
operation.
What Happens During
Optimization
Optimization identifies the accumulated loss (or gain) for each receive
and transmit path at the BTS site, and stores these values in a database.
S A receive path (RX) starts at the Duplexer Directional Coupler
(DRDC) or Transmit & Receive Dual Directional Coupler (TRDC)
antenna feedline port and travels through the DRDC/TRDC, the
Multi–coupler Preselector Card (MPC) and additional splitter
circuitry, ending at a Broad Band Transceiver (BBX) backplane slot in
the Small CDMA Channel Processor (SCCP) shelf.
S A transmit path (TX) starts at the SCCP shelf BBX backplane slot, is
routed to the Linear Power Amplifier (LPA) Trunking Module,
through the LPAs, back through the LPA Trunking Module, through
the bandpass filter or 2–cavity combiner, and ends at the
DRDC/TRDC antenna feedline port.
Six of the seven BBX2 boards in each SCCP shelf are optimized to
specific RX and TX antenna ports. The seventh BBX2 board acts in a
redundant capacity for BBX2 boards 1 through 6, and is optimized to all
antenna ports. A single value is generated for each complete path,
thereby eliminating the accumulation of error that would occur from
individually measuring and summing the gain and loss of each element
in the path.
BTS equipment factors in these values internally, leaving only
site–specific antenna feed line loss and antenna gain characteristics to be
factored in by the CFE when determining site Effective Radiated Power
(ERP) output power requirements.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
1-3
1
When to Optimize
New Installations
After the initial site installation, the BTS must be prepared for operation.
This preparation includes verifying hardware installation, initial
power–up, downloading of operating code, verifying GPS operation and
verifying transmit and receive paths.
Next, the optimization is performed. Optimization includes performance
verification and calibration of all transmit and receive RF paths, and
download of accumulated calibration data.
A calibration audit of all RF transmit paths may be performed any time
after optimization to verify BTS calibration.
After optimization, a series of manual pre–Acceptance Test Procedure
(ATP) verification tests are performed to verify alarm/redundancy
performance.
After manual pre–ATP verification tests, a series of ATPs are performed
to verify BTS performance. An ATP is also required before the site can
be placed in service.
Site Expansion
Optimization is also required after expansion of a site with additional,
interconnected BTS frames.
Periodic Optimization
Periodic optimization of a site may also be required, depending on the
requirements of the overall system.
Repaired Sites
IMPORTANT
1-4
Refer to Appendix B for a detailed FRU Optimization/ATP
Test Matrix outlining the minimum tests that must be
performed any time a BTS subassembly or RF cable
associated with it is replaced.
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Required Test Equipment and Software
Policy
To ensure consistent, reliable, and repeatable optimization test results,
test equipment and software meeting the following technical criteria
should be used to optimize the BTS equipment. Test equipment can, of
course, be substituted with other test equipment models if the equipment
meets the same technical specifications.
It is the responsibility of the customer to account for any measurement
variances and/or additional losses/inaccuracies that can be introduced
as a result of these substitutions. Before beginning optimization or
troubleshooting, make sure that the test equipment needed is on hand
and operating properly.
Test Equipment Calibration
Optimum system performance and capacity depend on regular equipment
service, calibration, and characterization prior to BTS optimization.
Follow the original equipment manufacture (OEM) recommended
maintenance and calibration schedules closely.
Test Cable Calibration
Equipment test cables are very important in optimization. It is
recommended that the cable calibration be run at every BTS with the test
cables attached. This method compensates for test cable insertion loss
within the test equipment itself. No other allowance for test cable
insertion loss needs to be made during the performance of tests.
Another method is to account for the loss by entering it into the CDMA
LMF during the optimization procedure. This method requires accurate
test cable characterization in a shop. The cable should be tagged with the
characterization information prior to field optimization.
Equipment Warm–up
After arriving at a site, the test equipment should be plugged in and
turned on to allow warm up and stabilization to occur for as long as
possible. The following pieces of test equipment must be warmed up for
a minimum of 60 minutes prior to using for BTS optimization or RFDS
calibration procedures:
S Communications test set.
S Rubidium time base.
S Power meter.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
1-5
1
Required Test Equipment and Software – continued
Required Test Equipment and
Software
The following test equipment and software is required for the
optimization procedure. Common assorted tools such as screwdrivers
and frame keys are also needed. Read the owner’s manual for all of the
test equipment to understand its individual operation before using the
tool in the optimization.
NOTE
Always refer to specific OEM test equipment
documentation for detailed operating instructions.
CDMA LMF Hardware Requirements
A CDMA LMF computer platform that meets the following
requirements (or better) is recommended:
Notebook computer
64 MB RAM minimum (128 MB recommended)
266 MHz (32 bit CPU) Pentium processor
4 Gbyte internal hard disk drive
SVGA 12.1–inch active matrix color display with 1024 x 768
(recommended) or 800 x 600 pixel resolution and capability to display
more than 265 colors
20X CD–ROM drive
3 1/2 inch floppy drive
56kbps V.90 modem
Serial port (COM 1)
Parallel port (LPT 1)
PCMCIA Ethernet interface card (for example, 3COM Etherlink III)
with a 10BaseT–to–coax adapter
S MSr Windows 98R Second Edition (SE) operating system
NOTE
If 800 x 600 pixel resolution is used, the CDMA LMF
window must be maximized after it is displayed.
CDMA LMF Software
The CDMA LMF is a graphical user interface (GUI) based Local
Maintenance Facility (LMF). This software product is specifically
designed to provide cellular communications field personnel with the
capability to support the following CDMA Base Transceiver Stations
(BTS) operations:
1-6
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Required Test Equipment and Software – continued
Installation
Maintenance
Calibration
Optimization
Ethernet LAN Transceiver (part of CGDSLMFCOMPAQNOV96)
S PCMCIA Ethernet Adpater + Ethernet UTP Adapter
3COM Model – Etherlink III 3C589B
used with
S Transition Engineering Model E–CX–TBT–03 10BaseT/10Base2
Converter (or equivalent)
NOTE
Xircom Model PE3–10B2 or its equivalent can also be used
to interface the CDMA LMF Ethernet connection to the
RFM frame.
Ethernet LAN External In/Out Port Adapter
Trompeter Electronics, Inc., AD–BJ20–E1–PL75 or equivalent BNC (F)
to TRB (M) adapter is required if it is necessary to connect the CDMA
LMF computer to the LAN external interface triaxial connectors located
in the power entry compartment.
RS–232 to GPIB interface
S National Instruments GPIB–232–CT with Motorola CGDSEDN04X
RS232 serial cable or equivalent; used to interface the CDMA LMF to
the test equipment.
S A standard RS–232 cable can be used with the following
modifications:
–Pin 8 (CTS) does not have to be jumpered/shorted to the others as it
is a driver output. The DTR is already a driver output signal. The
other pins are to receivers. Short pins 7, 1, 4, 6 on each cable end:
9–pin D (female)
9–pin D (female)
GND 5
5 GND
RX 3
2 TX
TX 2
3 RX
RTS 7
7 RTS
RSD/DCD 1
08/01/2001
1 RSD/DCD
DTR 4
4 DTR
DSR 6
6 DSR
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
1-7
1
Required Test Equipment and Software – continued
Model SLN2006A MMI interface kit
S Motorola Model TRN9666A null modem board. Connectors on
opposite sides of the board must be used as this performs a null
modem transformation between cables. This board can be used for
25–pin to 8–pin, 25–pin to 25–pin, and 10–pin to 10–pin conversions.
S Motorola 30–09786R01 MMI cable or equivalent; used to interface
the CDMA LMF serial port connection to the GLI, CSM, ETIB board,
and module debug serial ports.
Communications system analyzer CDMA/analog
The following communications system analyzers are supported by the
LMF:
S Motorola CyberTest
S Advantest R3465 Analyzer with R3561L Signal Generator
S Hewlett Packard Model HP 8921A/600 Analyzer including 83203B
CDMA Interface, manual control system card, and 83236A/B PCS
Interface for 1900 MHz BTSs.
S Hewlett Packard Model HP 8935 Analyzer
or a combination of test equipment supported by the CDMA LMF and
used during optimization and testing of the RF communications portion
of BTS equipment.
The analyzer provides the following functions:
Frequency counter.
Noise measurement meter.
Deviation meter.
RF power meter (average and code domain).
RF signal generator (capable of DSAT/CDMA modulation).
Audio signal generator.
AC voltmeter (with 600–ohm balanced audio input and high
impedance input mode).
C–Message filter.
Spectrum analyzer.
CDMA code domain analyzer.
GPIB cables
Hewlett Packard 10833A or equivalent; one or two meters long, used to
interconnect test equipment and CDMA LMF terminal.
Power meter
S Hewlett Packard Model HP437B with HP8481A power sensor capable
of measuring from –30 dBm to 20 dBm,
or
1-8
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Required Test Equipment and Software – continued
S Gigatronics 8542B power meter.
Timing reference cables
S Two Huber & Suhner 16MCX/11BNC/K02252D or equivalent; right
angle MCX–male to standard BNC–male RG316 cables; 10 ft. long
are required to interconnect the communications system analyzer to
SGLN4132A and SGLN1145A CSM board timing references,
or
S Two BNC–male to BNC–male RG316 cables; 3 meters (10 feet) long,
used to interconnect the communications system analyzer to
SGLN4132B and SGLN1145B (and later) CSM front panel timing
references in the RF Modem Frame.
Digital multimeter
Fluke Model 8062A with Y8134 test lead kit or equivalent; used for
precision DC and AC measurements to four decimal places.
Directional coupler
Narda Model 3020A 20 dB coupler terminated with two Narda Model
375BN–M loads, or equivalent.
RF attenuators
S 20 dB Fixed attenuator, 20 Watt (Narda 768–20), used in conjunction
with calibration of test cables or during general troubleshooting
procedures.
S 10 dB Fixed attenuator, 20 Watt (Narda 768–10), for cable calibration
with a Cybertest CDMA analyzer.
Clamp–on DC current probe
Amprobe CT600, or equivalent, 600 amp capability with jaw size which
accommodates 2/0 cable. Used with the DMM for back–up battery
charging testing.
Miscellaneous RF adapters, loads, etc.
As required to interface test cables and BTS equipment and for various
test setups. Should include at least (2) 50 Ohm loads (type N) for
calibration and (1) RF short.
RF load
100W non–radiating RF load used (as required) to provide dummy RF
loading during BTS transmit tests.
High–impedance conductive wrist strap
Motorola Model 42–80385A59; used to prevent damage from ESD when
handling or working with modules.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
1-9
1
Required Test Equipment and Software – continued
Driver bit for tamper–resistant fasteners
Torx tamper–resistant insert bit set, Grainger 5F530 or equivalent, to
remove tamper–resistant fasteners securing the frame rear access cover.
Optional Equipment
This section provides a list of additional equipment that might be
required during maintenance and troubleshooting operations.
NOTE
Not all optional equipment specified in this section will be
supported by the CDMA LMF in automated tests.
Duplexer
Filtronics Low IM Duplexer (Cm035–f2) or equivalent; used during
Spectral Purity Receive band noise tests.
Frequency counter
Stanford Research Systems SR620 or equivalent; used if direct
measurement of the 3 MHz or 19.6608 MHz references is required.
Spectrum analyzer
Spectrum Analyzer (HP8594E with CDMA personality card) or
equivalent; required for manual tests other than standard Receive band
spectral purity and TX LPA IM reduction verification tests performed by
the CDMA LMF.
LAN tester
Model NETcat 800 LAN troubleshooter (or equivalent); used to
supplement LAN tests using the ohm meter.
Span line (T1/E1) verification equipment
As required for the local application.
RF test cable (if not provided with test equipment)
Motorola Model TKN8231A; used to connect test equipment to the BTS
transmitter output during optimization or during general troubleshooting
procedures.
Oscilloscope
Tektronics Model 2445 or equivalent; used for waveform viewing,
timing, and measurements, or during general troubleshooting procedures.
2–way splitter
Mini–Circuits Model ZFSC–2–2500 or equivalent; used to provide the
diversity receive input to the BTS.
1-10
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Required Test Equipment and Software – continued
CDMA subscriber mobile or portable radiotelephone
Safco Model 2136–150 with power supply and antenna; used to provide
test transmission and reception during BTS maintenance and
troubleshooting. Do not substitute other models that do not feature
special test modes. Two radios will be required for system and
drive–around testing after optimization and BTS ATP are completed.
RF circulator
Circulator (FERROCOM 5809866C01) or equivalent; can substitute for
a duplexer during Receive sensitivity FER testing in conjunction with
Safco CDMA mobile.
High stability 10 MHz rubidium standard
Stanford Research Systems SR625 or equivalent. Required for CSM and
LFR/HSO frequency verification.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
1-11
1
Required Documents and Related Publications
Required Documents
The following documents are required to perform optimization of the
cell site equipment:
S Site Document (generated by Motorola Systems Engineering), which
includes:
– General site information
– Floor plan
– RF power levels
– Frequency plan (includes Site PN and operating frequencies)
– Channel allocation (paging, traffic, etc.)
– Board placement
– Site wiring list
– Site–specific CDF file
S Demarcation Document (Scope of Work Agreement)
S Equipment manuals for non-Motorola test equipment
Related Publications
Additional, detailed information about the installation, operation, and
maintenance of the SC4812ET Lite BTS and its components is included
in the following publications:
CDMA RFDS User’s Guide; 68P64114A51
LMF Help function
LMF CLI Reference; 68P09253A56
CDMA RFDS Hardware Installation; 68P64113A93
SC4812ET Lite Installation; 68P09253A36
SC4812ET Lite Field Replaceable Units; 68P09253A49
SC4812T/ET/ET Lite Troubleshooting; 68P09252A93
Frame Mounting Guide Analog/CDMA/TDMA; 68P09226A18
Cellular Glossary of Terms and Acronyms; 68P09213A95
M–PATHt T1 Channel Service Unit User’s Guide, ADC Kentrox
part number 65–77538101
S M–PATHt E1 Channel Service Unit Installation Guide, ADC
Kentrox part number 1174662
S 2–Slot Universal Shelf Installation Guide, ADC Kentrox part number
65–78070001
1-12
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
68P09253A60
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Terms and Abbreviations
Standard and Non–standard
Terms and Abbreviations
Standard terms and abbreviations used in this manual are defined in
Cellular Glossary of Terms and Acronyms; 68P09213A95. Any
non–standard terms or abbreviations included in this manual are listed in
Table 1-1.
Table 1-1: Non–Standard Terms and Abbreviations
Term or Abbreviation
ACLC
Definition
AC Load Center. An SC4812ET Lite RF Base Transceiver Station (BTS)
subassembly which provides the frame interface for external AC power
connection and internal AC circuit control and protection.
CCD
Clock Combining and Distribution. SC4812–series BTS CDMA Channel
Processor (CCP) shelf module which accepts timing signals from the active
source and distributes them to other CCP shelf modules.
CIO
Combiner Input/Output.
DMAC
Digital Metering, Alarm, Control. Part of the Meter Alarm Panel (MAP) which
provides control of and status information for the AC power rectifiers as well as
back–up battery monitoring and test capability. Term is used interchangeably with
MAP (see below).
DRDC
Duplexer, Receive Filter, Dual Directional Coupler. Provides duplexing of BTS
transmit and receive signals to a single antenna and antenna signal sampling in
either the forward (transmit) or reflected (receive) direction for use by an RF
Diagnostic Subsystem (RFDS).
EMPC
Expansion Multi–coupler Preselector Card. BTS expansion frame MPC module
which is used to receive, amplify, and distribute RX signals from the starter frame
MPC.
ETIB
External Trunked Interface Board. Module providing status indicators and MMI
interface connections for LPAs in SC4812ET and SC4812ET Lite BTS frames.
HSO
High Stability Oscillator. Module providing backup timing source for a BTS when
the timing signal from the GPS or RGPS module is unavailable.
HSOX
HSO Expansion. Module used in a BTS expansion frame to interface with the
starter frame HSO or LFR and distribute the timing signals to the expansion frame
CSM modules.
LPAC
Linear Power Amplifier Controller
MAP
Meter Alarm Panel. SC4812ET Lite Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) which
contains the functions of both the Temperature Compensation Panel (TCP) and
the DMAC. Term is used interchangeably with DMAC.
MPC
Multi–coupler Preselector Card. BTS CCP shelf module used to amplify and
distribute RX signals to BBX modules.
PDA
Power Distribution Assembly. Assembly in an SC4812ET Lite BTS providing
internal DC power distribution and circuit protection.
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
1-13
1
Terms and Abbreviations – continued
Table 1-1: Non–Standard Terms and Abbreviations
Term or Abbreviation
1-14
Definition
RGD
Remote Global Positioning System (GPS) Distribution
SCCP
Small CDMA Channel Processor. The type of CCP shelf used in the SC4812ET
Lite BTS.
test equipment set
The CDMA LMF computer, communications test set, directional couplers,
attenuators, termination loads, associated test cables, and adapters needed for the
complete calibration and acceptance testing of a BTS. The test equipment set is
calibrated and maintained as a unit. When one component of a set is replaced, the
complete set must be recallibrated to ensure measurement errors are not
introduced during BTS optimization and ATP.
TCP
Temperature Compensation Panel. A function of the SC4812ET Lite MAP which
provides the capability to adjust DC voltage output of the rectifiers to compensate
for variations resulting from temperature changes.
TRDC
Transmit & Receive Dual Directional Coupler (Non–duplexed, Receive Filter).
TRDCs contains separate transmit and receive paths and bandpass filters which
are not connected electrically. Transmit and receive antenna signals are not
duplexed and must be handled by separate antennas. Each RF path contains a dual
directional coupler on the antenna port which allows sampling of antenna signals
in the forward (transmit) and reflected (receive) directions for use by an RFDS.
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
BTS Equipment Identification
Equipment Overview
The SC4812ET Lite BTS frame consists of a single, outdoor,
weatherized cabinet containing RF and power components. The BTS is
functionally similar to the two–cabinet SC4812ET, but provides more
flexibility in site selection because of its smaller footprint and lighter
weight. The BTS is powered by 240 Vac, rectified internally to +27 Vdc,
and can support up to two carriers in a 3–sector configuration. An
SC4812ET Lite starter frame with the maximum of one SC4812ET Lite
expansion frame can support a maximum of four carriers in a 3–sector
configuration. Six–sector operation is not supported with any SC4812ET
Lite configuration.
The BTS frame houses the fan modules, RF compartment heat
exchanger, Small CDMA Channel Processor shelf (SCCP), RF Linear
Power Amplifier (LPA) modules, LPA trunking modules, bandpass
filters or 2:1 combiners, and Duplexer Directional Couplers (DRDC) or
Triplexer Directional Couplers (TRDC). Power components include an
AC Load Center (ACLC), rectifiers, a +27 Vdc Power Distribution
Assembly (PDA), backup batteries, battery heaters, and one duplex
GFCI 115 Vac utility outlet.
Logical BTS Numbering
An SC4812ET Lite logical BTS can consist of up to two SC4812ET Lite
frames. In a logical BTS, all frames located at a site are identified as
parts of a single, numbered BTS (for example, BTS–812). Each frame is
assigned a unique frame number. The first, or starter, frame of a logical
BTS has a –1 suffix (for example, BTS–812–1) and the second, or
expansion, frame of the logical BTS is numbered with the suffix, –101
(e. g. BTS–812–101).
Figure 1-1 shows the frame configuration for a logical BTS consisting of
two SC4812ET Lite frames. The figure also shows the BTS–to–CBSC
Transcoder and inter–frame span configurations which can be employed
with an SC4812ET Lite logical BTS.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
1-15
1
BTS Equipment Identification – continued
Figure 1-1: SC4812ET Lite Logical BTS Span Cabling
TO XC
(Optional)
TO XC
BTSSPAN 101
BTSSPAN 1
BTSSPAN 102
(Optional)
Frame 1
Frame 101
(Starter
Frame)
(Expansion
Frame)
SCCP Shelf Card/Module Device ID Numbers
All Ethernet LAN–addressable modules in the logical BTS frames at a
single site are also identified with unique Device ID numbers dependent
upon the Frame ID number in which they are located. Refer to Table 1-2,
Table 1-3, and Figure 1-5 for specific SCCP Shelf Device ID numbers.
Table 1-2: SCCP Cage Module Device ID Numbers (Top Shelf)
Frame
Module ID Number (Left to Right)
Power Power AMR GLI2
(PS–1) (PS–2) –1
–1
MCC2
BBX2
BBX2–R
MPC/
EMPC
–1
–
–
R1
–
101
–
–
101
101
101
102
101
102
103
R101
–
Table 1-3: SCCP Cage Module Device ID Numbers (Bottom Shelf)
Frame
Module ID Number (Left to Right)
HSO/ CSM CSM CCD CCD
LFR
–1
–2
AMR GLI2–
–2
–
–
–
–
101
–
101
102
–
–
–
102
102
1-16
MCC2
BBX2
103 104 104 105 106
SW
MPC/
EMPC
–2
–
–
–
–
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Cabinet Identification
Major Components
Figure 1-2 illustrates the features of the BTS frame, the single major
component of the Motorola SC4812ET Lite.
Figure 1-2: SC4812ET Lite BTS Frame
Power Entry
and
Network Interface Compartment
Main Door
with Heat Exchanger
Battery Compartment Door
(Can only be opened after Main Door is open)
SCCP Shelf Backplane
Rear Access Panel
RF Interface Panel
SC4812ETL0001–1
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
1-17
1
Internal Assembly Location and Identification
Internal Assemblies and FRUs
Figure 1-3 shows the location of the internal assemblies and Field
Replaceable Units (FRU). A brief description of each item is found in
the following paragraphs.
Figure 1-3: Internal Assemblies and FRUs
(Cabinet doors not shown for clarity)
Span I/O
CSUs
External
Span I/O
LPA Trunking Blower
LPAC
Module
Assembly
LPAs
Rectifiers
MAP
CSU Shelf
SCCP Fans
ETIB
SCCP Shelf
RFDS
ESD Grounding
Jack
DC PDA
Filter/Combiner
Shelf (Bandpass
filters shown)
DRDC/TRDC
Shelf
ACLC
GFCI Utility
Outlet
Back–up Batteries
(Heaters underneath batteries)
SC4812ETL0002–4
1-18
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Internal Assembly Location and Identification – continued
AC Load Center (ACLC)
The ACLC is the frame entry point for AC power. It incorporates AC
power control, distribution, and surge protection (Figure 1-3).
Back–up Batteries
The batteries (Figure 1-3) provide +24 Vdc back–up for the frame should
AC power be interrupted. The frame can accommodate a total of 12 12V
batteries grouped in six strings. Each string consists of two batteries
connected in series for 24 Vdc output. The six strings are connected in
parallel to meet the current–draw requirements of the frame. The
maximum time duration of the back–up capability depends on system
configuration.
Battery Heaters
The battery heater pads warm the batteries to provide improved
cold–weather performance. A separate heater pad is required for each
battery string and is located between each battery string and its
respective support shelf.
Channel Service Units (CSU) (Optional)
The SC4812ET Lite can be equipped with up to two M–PATH 537 CSU
or two M–PATH 437 CSU modules which install in the CSU shelf
(Figure 1-3). These modules allow monitoring of span performance and
provide capability for remote network management.
CSU Shelf
The CSU shelf is an ADC Kentrox 2–slot Universal Shelf which can
accommodate two M–PATH 537 or two M–PATH 437 CSU modules.
When the optional CSU modules are not installed, cover plates are
installed over the CSU card slots (Figure 1-3).
DC Power Distribution Assembly (PDA)
Both rectifier output voltage and back–up battery voltage are routed to
the PDA (Figure 1-3) where they are combined into system DC bus
voltage. The PDA provides distribution of DC power and system DC
bus protection from the loads with MAIN BREAKER and the smaller
post–distribution circuit breakers. MAIN BREAKER permits removal of
all frame loading from the bus. The 13 post–distribution circuit breakers
permit removal of individual loads.
Duplexer, Receive filter, Dual Directional Coupler (DRDC)
DRDCs permit duplexing of sector transmit and receive signals on a
single antenna. The DRDCs also incorporate a receive bandpass filter
and dual directional couplers which permit signal monitoring by the RF
Diagnostic Subsystem.
ET Interface Board (ETIB) and LPA Control (LPAC) Board
The ETIB is an interconnect module with status LEDs, MMI recepticles,
and secondary surge protection for the LPA modules. The LPAC board
provides the interface for the LPA connections (Figure 1-3).
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
1-19
1
Internal Assembly Location and Identification – continued
Filter/Combiner Shelf (Bandpass Filters or 2:1 Combiners)
The filter/combiner shelf (Figure 1-3) holds the transmit bandpass filters
or 2:1 combiners, depending on system configuration.
Heat Exchanger
The heat exchanger provides cooling to the frame RF compartment. The
fan speed of the heat exchanger adjusts automatically with temperature.
The heat exchanger is located in the frame main door (Figure 1-2).
Punchblock
The punchblock (Figure 1-4) is the interface between the frame and the
T1/E1 span lines. It is located on the right–hand side of the power entry
compartment at the rear of the frame. The punchblock provides the
initial interconnection between the spans and the Customer–defined I/O,
alarms, multi–frame timing source (RGPS and RHSO), and pilot beacon
control (optional).
Figure 1-4: 50–Pair Punchblock
50–Pin
Punchblock
(Cabling not
shown for
clarity)
Rear of Frame
(Power Entry Compartment
Door Open)
Section of Network Interface Panel
(Rotated 30_ Right)
1-20
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
SC4812ETL0024–1
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Internal Assembly Location and Identification – continued
Rectifiers
The rectifiers (Figure 1-3) convert AC power supplied to the frame to
+27.4 Vdc which powers the frame and maintains the charge of the
back–up batteries. Rectifier positions are numbered 1 through 4 from left
to right when facing the frame. Single–carrier frames are equipped with
three rectifiers installed in positions 1, 2, and 3. Two–carrier frames are
equipped with four rectifiers. The number of rectifiers supplied with
each configuration provides N+1 redundancy.
RF Diagnostic Subsystem (RFDS)
The RFDS (Figure 1-5) provides the capability for remotely monitoring
the status of the SC4812ET Lite transmit and receive paths. For
IS–95A/B operation, the RFDS is a COBRA model. To support 1X
operation, the RFDS must the 1X–capable COBRA–II.
Small CDMA Channel Processor (SCCP) Shelf
The SCCP shelf has provisions for the following types and quantities of
modules (Figure 1-3 and Figure 1-5):
08/01/2001
Alarm Monitoring and Reporting (AMR) cards (2)
Combiner Input/Output (CIO) card (1)
Multi–coupler Preselector Cards (MPC3) (2)
Broadband Transceiver (BBX2 or BBX–1X) cards, primary (6)
BBX2 or BBX–1X card, redundant (1)
CDMA Clock Distribution (CCD) cards (2)
Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) on two cards (one with GPS
receiver, if ordered)
Fan modules (2)
Filler panel (as required)
Group Line Interface (GLI2) cards (2)
High Stability Oscillator (HSO)/Low Frequency Receiver (LFR) card
(Optional) (1)
Multi–Channel CDMA (MCC8E, MCC24, or MCC–1X) cards (4)
Power supply cards (2)
Switch card (1)
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
1-21
Internal Assembly Location and Identification – continued
MPC
BBX2
BBX2
BBX2
BBX2
MCC8 E or MCC24
GLI2
MCC8 E or MCC24
AMR
Power Supply
Power Supply
19mm Filler Panel
Figure 1-5: SCCP Shelf, IS–95A/B and 1X Devices
FILLER
HSO/LFR
CSM 1
POWER 1
CSM 101
POWER 2
CSM 2
CIO
MPC
SWITCH
MCC
101 101 101 102
AMR GLI2
MCC
CCD 102 102 103 104
POWER 2
CSM 102
BBX2
BBX2
HSO/LFR
POWER 1
MCC8 E or MCC24
BBX2
FILLER
MCC8 E or MCC24
AMR
GLI2
AMR GLI2
CCD
CCD
CSM
CSM
CCD
NOTES:
1. MCCs may be MCC8Es, MCC24s, or
MCC–1Xx
2. BBXx may be BBX2s or BBX–1Xs
HSO
BBX2
FRAME 1
SWITCH
MPC
101 102 103
R101
BBX2
104 105 106 SWITCH
MPC
FRAME 101
(Expansion Frame)
R1
SC4812ETL0003–4
Span I/O Boards
The two span I/O boards, Span I/O A and Span I/O B (Figure 1-3),
provide the span line interface from the punchblock or the CSU
modules, if equipped, to the SCCP backplane.
Transmit & receive, non–duplexed, Receive filter, Dual
Directional Coupler (TRDC)
TRDCs provide separate, bandpass–filtered sector transmit and receive
paths. When TRDCs are used separate transmit and receive antennas are
required for each sector. As with DRDCs, TRDCs dual directional
couplers for each antenna path which permit signal monitoring by the
RFDS.
1-22
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Internal Assembly Location and Identification – continued
Figure 1-6: RF Interface Panel, DRDCs Installed
TX IN
NOTE: Plugs are installed
when TX IN combiners
are not fitted.
GROUND
1A
2A
2B
TX OUT
REMOTE ASU
ANTENNAS
3A
1B
3B
NOTES:
1. CARRIER 1 TX/RX
USES ANTENNA
PORTS 1A, 2A, 3A;
RX DIVERSITY
FROM PORTS 1B,
2B, 3B.
RX EXPANSION
1A
2A
3A
1B
DUPLEXED TX &
RX PORTS
2B
3B
2. CARRIER 2 TX/RX
USES ANTENNA
PORTS 1B, 2B, 3B;
RX DIVERSITY
FROM PORTS 1A,
2A, 3A.
SC4812ETL0018–2
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
1-23
1
Internal Assembly Location and Identification – continued
Figure 1-7: RF Interface Panel, TRDCs Installed
NOTE: Plugs are installed
when TX IN combiners
are not fitted.
TX PORTS
GROUND
RX PORTS
1A
2A
3A
1B
2B
3B
NOTES:
1. CARRIER 1 TX USES
TX PORTS 1A, 2A, 3A;
CARRIER 1 RX USES
RX PORTS 1A, 2A, 3A;
CARRIER 1 RX
DIVERSITY USES RX
PORTS 1B, 2B, 3B
TX OUT
REMOTE ASU
RX EXPANSION
1A
2A
3A
1B
2B
3B
2. CARRIER 2 TX USES
TX PORTS 1B, 2B, 3B;
CARRIER 2 RX USES
RX PORTS 1B, 2B, 3B;
CARRIER 2 RX
DIVERSITY USES RX
PORTS 1A, 2A, 3A
SC4812ETL0019–2
1-24
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Internal Assembly Location and Identification – continued
Figure 1-8: RFDS, DRDC, and TRDC Details
RFDS
DUPLEXED
TX & RX ANTENNA
BTS
CPLD
TX
RX
DRDC
ANT
CPLD
3B
2B
1B
3A
2A
DRDC/TRDC
ANTENNA CONNECTOR
ASSIGNMENTS
TX
ANTENNA
1A
TX BTS
CPLD
TX ANT
CPLD
TX
RX
ANTENNA
RX
RX ANT
CPLD
TRDC
RX BTS
CPLD
SC4812ETL0005–3
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
1-25
1
Internal Assembly Location and Identification – continued
SCCP Cage Configuration and
the 1X Devices
SC4812ET Lite frames have one SCCP cage which will support up to 4
MCC cards and 6 BBX cards.
MCC Cards
A BTS may be configured with a mix of MCC–8E, MCC–24, and
MCC–1X cards. Any MCC card slot will support any of the three MCC
types. For 1X capability under R16.0, at least one MCC card must be an
MCC–1X which can be installed in any MCC card slot.
BBX Cards
Up to 6 BBX cards of mixed BBX2s and BBX–1Xs can also be
supported. BBX card slots 1 through 6 are carrier– and
sector–dependent. As a result, the BBX slots dedicated to the sectors for
one carrier should be populated with the same type of cards. Refer to
Table 1-5 for BBX card slot carrier and sector correlations.
The BBX–R1 card slot is dedicated to the redundant BBX. This slot will
support either a BBX2 or a BBX–1X. If a cage has BBX–1X carriers,
the redundant BBX (BBXR) must be a BBX–1X card to provide 1X
redundancy support.
1-26
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
BTS Sector Configurations
Sector Configuration
There are a number of ways to configure the BTS frame. Table 1-4
outlines the basic requirements. For more detailed information also see
Table 1-5 and Figure 1-9. Bandpass filters are used for single–carrier
configurations and two–carrier systems when carriers are either adjacent
or not adjacent
Table 1-4: BTS Sector Configuration
Number of
Carriers
Number of
Sectors
Channel Spacing
Filter/Combiner Requirements
N/A
Bandpass Filter
Adjacent or
Non–adjacent
Bandpass Filter
The matrix in Table 1-5 shows the correlation between the various sector
configurations and BBX cards.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
1-27
1
BTS Sector Configurations – continued
Table 1-5: Sector Configurations
Configuration
Description
3–Sector / 1 Carrier
The configuration below maps RX and TX with bandpass filters for a 3–sector/1–carrier frame.
ANT 1A
ANT 2A
ANT 3A
ANT 1B
ANT 2B
ANT 3B
TX1 / RX1A TX2 / RX2A TX3 / RX3A
RX1B
RX2B
RX3B
Carrier #
BBX2–1
BBX2–2
BBX2–3
BBX2–1
BBX2–2
BBX2–3
(diversity
(diversity
(diversity
RX)
RX)
RX)
3–Sector / 2–ADJACENT or 2–NON–ADJACENT Carriers
The configuration below maps RX and TX with bandpass filters for 3–sectors/2–carriers for both
adjacent and non–adjacent channels.
ANT 1A
ANT 2A
ANT 3A
ANT 1B
ANT 2B
ANT 3B
TX1 / RX1A TX2 / RX2A TX3 / RX3A TX4 / RX1B TX5 / RX2B TX6 / RX3B
Carrier #
BBX2–1
BBX2–2
BBX2–3
BBX2–1
BBX2–2
BBX2–3
(diversity
(diversity
(diversity
RX)
RX)
RX)
BBX2–4
BBX2–5
BBX2–6
BBX2–4
BBX2–5
BBX2–6
(RX)
(RX)
(RX)
(TX &
(TX &
(TX &
diversity
diversity
diversity
RX)
RX)
RX)
Figure 1-9: SC4812ET Lite LPA Configuration with Bandpass Filters
(Starter Frame Mapping Only)
Table 1-5
Configuration Numbers 1 and 2
Bandpass Filters
3–Sector
CARRIER 1
SECTOR 1, 2, 3
CARRIER 2
SECTOR 1, 2, 3
SC4812ETL0011–3
1-28
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Chapter 2: Preliminary Operations
Table of Contents
08/01/2001
Preliminary Operations: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cellsite Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site Equipage Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial Installation of Boards/Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Frame SCCP Configuration Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-2
Ethernet LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet LAN Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
2-3
Initial Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial Inspection and Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power System Pre-Power Application Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External AC Power Connection Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applying AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power Application and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Discharge Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-7
2-9
2-12
2-14
2-15
2-16
2-17
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Preliminary Operations: Overview
Introduction
This section first verifies proper frame equipage. This includes verifying
module placement, jumper, and dual in–line package (DIP) switch
settings against the site-specific documentation supplied for each BTS
application. Next, pre-power up and initial power-up procedures are
presented.
Cellsite Types
Sites are configured as 3–sector with one or two carriers. Each type has
unique characteristics and must be optimized accordingly.
CDF
The Cell-site Data File (CDF) contains site type and equipage data
information and passes it directly to the CDMA Local Maintenance
Facility (LMF) during optimization. The number of BTS frames, BBX2
and MCC24 boards, and linear power amplifier assignments are some of
the equipage data included in the CDF.
Site Equipage Verification
Review the site documentation. Match the site engineering equipage data
to the actual boards and modules shipped to the site. Physically inspect
and verify the equipment provided for the frame.
CAUTION
Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap
while handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage
by ESD. After removal, the card/module should be placed
on a conductive surface or back into the anti–static bag it
was shipped in.
Initial Installation of
Boards/Modules
Table 2-1: Initial Installation of Boards/Modules
Step
Action
Refer to the site documentation and, if it was not previously done, slide all boards and modules into
the appropriate shelves as required. DO NOT SEAT the boards and modules at this time.
As the actual site hardware is installed, record the serial number of each module on a “Serial Number
Checklist” in the site logbook.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
2-1
Preliminary Operations: Overview
– continued
Setting Frame SCCP
Configuration Switch
The backplane configuration switch is located behind the frame rear
access panel. It must be set for the frame type as shown in Figure 2-1.
The switch setting must be verified and set before power is applied to the
BTS equipment.
Figure 2-1: Backplane DIP Switch Settings
2-2
MODEM_FRAME_ID_0
EXPANSION
FRAME SETTING
(FRAME 101)
MODEM_FRAME_ID_1
ON
OFF
RIGHT / LEFT
STARTER
FRAME SETTING
(FRAME 1)
BOTTOM / TOP
ON
OFF
REAR ACCESS
PANEL
T–27 BUTTON HEAD OR
T–30 PAN HEAD
TAMPER–RESISTANT
FASTENER (14)
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
SC4812ETL0022–1
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Ethernet LAN
Ethernet LAN Termination
For proper operation, each end of the primary and redundant BTS
Ethernet Local Area Networks (LAN) must be terminated with a
50–ohm load. For a BTS consisting of a single frame, this is done by
placing 50–ohm triaxial terminations on the LAN A and B external IN
and OUT connectors located in the power entry compartment
(Figure 2-2). When the LAN links multiple frames in a logical BTS, the
50–ohm triaxial terminations must be installed on all uncabled LAN A
and B external connectors on each frame.
Check the LAN A and B external IN and OUT connectors in the power
entry compartment of each frame, and be sure terminations are installed
on all the uncabled external LAN connectors.
Figure 2-2: External Ethernet LAN Connectors
LAN A OUT
LAN A IN
Rear of Frame
(Power Entry Compartment
Door Open)
LAN B IN
LAN B OUT
Section of Network Interface Panel
(Rotated 30_ Right)
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
SC4812ETL0024–2
PRELIMINARY
2-3
Initial Power Up
Introduction
The following information is used to check for any electrical short
circuits and to verify the operation and tolerances of the cell site and
BTS power supply units before applying power for the first time. It
contains instructional information on the proper initial power up
procedures for the SC4812ET Lite for both the North American version
and the International version. If directions are different for either version,
they are called out within the procedure. Please pay attention to all
cautions and warning statements in order to prevent accidental injury to
personnel.
Required Tools
The following tools are used in the procedures.
S Clamp–on DC current probe (600 amp capability with jaw size to
accommodate 2/0 cable).
S Digital Multimeter (DMM) with standard 2mm (.080”) tip probes
S Hot Air Gun – (optional for part of the Alarm Verification)
Cabling Inspection
Using the site-specific documentation generated by Motorola Systems
Engineering, verify that the following cable systems are properly
connected:
S Receive RF cabling – up to six RX cables
S Transmit RF cabling – up to six TX cables
IMPORTANT
For DC power applications (+27 V):
S The positive power cable is red.
S The negative power cable is black. (The black power
cable is at ground potential.)
Initial Inspection and Setup
CAUTION
Ensure all battery shelf circuit breakers (Figure 2-3) for
unused battery positions are off (pulled out) before and
during the entire power up process. Leave these breakers in
the off position when leaving the site.
Table 2-2: Initial Inspection and Setup
Step
Action
Be sure that the facility circuit breaker controlling external AC power supplied to the frame is set to
OFF.
Be sure that all AC Load Center (ACLC), all DC Power Distribution Assembly (PDA), and all battery
shelf circuit breakers are turned OFF.
. . . continued on next page
2-4
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Initial Power Up – continued
Table 2-2: Initial Inspection and Setup
Step
Action
Confirm that the Meter Alarm Panel (MAP) POWER switch and all LEDs (Figure 2-9) are OFF. If
any LEDs are lighted, re–check and turn OFF all battery shelf circuit breakers.
If a heat source was placed in the RF compartment to prevent condensation prior to BTS power–up,
turn off the heat source and remove it and any associated cabling from the BTS before proceeding.
Confirm that the external 220 Vac supply is correctly connected to the ACLC input by performing the
procedure in Table 2-4.
Figure 2-3: Frame Power Subassemblies, North American and
International Cabinets
AC Rectifiers
External Blower
Assembly
LPAs
Battery Shelf
Circuit Breakers
(Between Bus Bar
and Cabinet Wall)
Meter Alarm
Panel (MAP)
With TCU
SCCP Fans
ETIB
SCCP Shelf
RFDS
DC PDA
ACLC Circuit Breaker
Access Door
Utility
Outlet
NOTE:
GFCI capability is built into the Utility Outlet of the North American Cabinet.
GFCI capability is built into the circuit breakers of the International Cabinet
08/01/2001
Backup Batteries
(Heaters underneath batteries)
SC4812ETL0002–3
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
2-5
Initial Power Up – continued
Figure 2-4: ACLC Circuit Breaker Panel – North American
LEDs
CAUTION
LIVE TERMINALS
ATTENTION
RECT. 1/3
RECT. 2/4
MAIN
HEATER
GFI
SC4812ETL0008–1
Figure 2-5: ACLC Circuit Breaker Panel – International
JOCYLN
LEDs
ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS
CAUTION
ATTENTION
LIVE TERMINALS
RECT 1/3
2-6
RECT 2/4
MAIN
HEATER
GFI
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Initial Power Up – continued
Figure 2-6: DC PDA
1A
1C
3A
3C
SHUT OFF BOTH BREAKERS
ONLY DURING HEAT EXCHANGER
MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR
30
30
30
30
15
1B
1D
3B
3D
PILOT
BEACON
25
25
MAIN BREAKER
LPA
BLOWERS
HEAT EXCHANGER
CAUTION
LPA
300
10
15
PS1
PS2
50
50
PUSH BUTTON
TO RESET
LPA BLOWERS
ETIB
OPTIONS
SC4812ETL0009–3
DC Power System Pre-Power
Application Test
Before applying any power to the BTS frame, follow the procedure in
Table 2-3 to verify there are no shorts in the DC power distribution
system.
NOTE
The procedure in Table 2-3 is required only on initial BTS
power–up or following maintenance when any major
power components (e.g., ACLC, DC PDA, Meter Alarm
Panel) were replaced or internal DC power cables were
disconnected.
Table 2-3: DC Power System Pre–Power Application Test
Step
Action
Physically verify all ACLC front–panel circuit breakers (Figure 2-4) are OFF (down), all DC PDA
circuit breakers (Figure 2-6) are set to OFF (pulled out), and all battery shelf circuit breakers
(Figure 2-3) are OFF (pulled out).
Visually ensure that all AC rectifier modules (Figure 2-3) are not powered (DC, PWR, and bar graph
LEDs are not lighted), that the MAP power switch (Figure 2-9) is OFF, and that no LEDs on the
MAP are lighted.
Inside the battery compartment, measure the voltage between the + (red) and – (black) battery bus
bars. There should be no 27 Vdc present.
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
2-7
Initial Power Up – continued
Table 2-3: DC Power System Pre–Power Application Test
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
Do not unseat the AC rectifier modules in the following step.
Perform the following:
S In the frame RF compartment, unseat all circuit boards/ modules (except CCD and CIO cards) in the
SCCP shelf, but leave them in their respective slots.
S In the frame LPA compartment, disconnect the Linear Power Amplifier (LPA) cables from the
compartment bulkhead feed through connector.
Set the DMM to measure resistance, and inside the battery compartment, measure the resistance
between the + (red) and – (black) battery bus bars. The resistance should measure > 1 ΜΩ.
Leave the DMM set to measure resistance, and insert the probes into the MAP VOLT and AMP TEST
POINTS (Figure 2-9). Place the (+) DMM probe into the (–) AMP TEST POINT. Place the (–) DMM
probe into the (–) VOLT TEST POINT. Resistance should measure greater than 750 Ω.
On the DC PDA, set the MAIN BREAKER to the ON position by pushing it in. Resistance between
the MAP (–) VOLT TEST POINT and the (–) AMP TEST POINT should measure between 300 Ω.
minimum 900 Ω. maximum.
Before proceeding, be sure the SCCP shelf power/converter modules PS1 and PS2 are correct by
verifying that the locking/retracting tabs appear as follows:
(in +27 volt systems)
–
! CAUTION
Using the incorrect type of power/converter modules will damage the module, the SCCP shelf, and
other modules installed in the SCCP shelf.
* IMPORTANT
In the following steps, if the DMM reads between 300 Ω minimum and 900 Ω maximum after
inserting any board/module, a low impedance problem probably exists in that board/module. Replace
the suspect board/module and repeat the test. If test still fails, isolate the problem before proceeding.
Insert and lock the PS1 DC–DC converter module into its slot, and and turn ON the PS1 DC circuit
breaker on the DC PDA.
10
Resistance between the MAP (–) VOLT TEST POINT and the (–) AMP TEST POINT should
typically increase as capacitors charge, finally measuring between 300 Ω minimum and 900 Ω.
maximum.
11
Repeat steps 9 and 10 for the PS2 converter module/circuit breaker and all other remaining modules in
the SCCP shelf.
12
On the DC PDA, set the LPA 1A–1B circuit breaker to the ON position by pushing it in, and repeat
step 10.
13
Repeat step 12 for each of the three remaining LPA circuit breakers.
. . . continued on next page
2-8
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Initial Power Up – continued
Table 2-3: DC Power System Pre–Power Application Test
Step
14
Action
Carefully reconnect each LPA cable one at a time. Repeat step 10 after reconnecting each cable.
S A typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as module input capacitors
charge, finally indicating between 300 Ω minimum and 900 Ω. maximum.
15
Set the Pilot Beacon, both Heat Exchanger, ETIB, and Options circuit breakers to ON one at a time.
Repeat step 10 after pushing in each circuit breaker.
16
Set all DC PDA circuit breakers to OFF (pulled out).
CAUTION
Failure to properly connect the external AC power cable
will damage the surge protection module inside the ACLC.
External AC Power Connection
Verification
Following verification of frame DC power system integrity, external AC
power connections must be verified. To accomplish this, the series of AC
voltage measurements specified in Table 2-4 is required.
Table 2-4: AC Voltage Measurements
Step
Action
NOTE
This procedure is required only after external AC power wiring has been initially connected or
removed and reconnected to the frame.
n WARNING
Ensure the frame is unpowered by setting the facility circuit breaker controlling external AC power
supplied to the frame to OFF.
Physically verify all DC PDA circuit breakers are set to OFF (pulled out), and all battery shelf circuit
breakers are OFF (pulled out).
Open the ACLC circuit breaker access door, and set all ACLC circuit breakers to OFF (down).
Remove the four screws securing the ACLC front panel assembly, and remove the ACLC front panel
assembly to gain access to the AC circuit breaker input terminals (Figure 2-8).
Apply external AC power to the frame by setting the facility circuit breaker to ON.
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
2-9
Initial Power Up – continued
Table 2-4: AC Voltage Measurements
Step
Action
! CAUTION
North AMERICAN Cabinet only:
If the AC voltages measured in the following steps exceed 120 V when measuring from terminals L1
or L2 to neutral or ground, STOP and DO NOT proceed until the cause of the higher voltages are
determined. The frame will be damaged if the Main breaker is turned on with excessive voltage on the
inputs.
Measure the AC voltage from terminal L1 to neutral.
North American Cabinet:
S Voltage should be in the nominal range of 115 to 120 Vac.
International Cabinet:
S Voltage should be in the nominal range of 210 to 240 Vac.
Measure the AC voltage from terminal L1 to ground.
North American Cabinet:
S Voltage should be in the nominal range of 115 to 120 Vac.
International Cabinet:
S Voltage should be in the nominal range of 210 to 240 Vac.
Steps 7a through 7c apply to the North American cabinet only. If working on a International cabinet
continue to step 8.
7a
Measure the AC voltage from terminal L2 to neutral on the North American cabinet.
S Voltage should be in the nominal range of 115 to 120 Vac.
7b
Measure the AC voltage from terminal L2 to ground on the North American cabinet.
S Voltage should be in the nominal range of 115 to 120 Vac.
7c
! CAUTION
If the AC voltages measured (on the North American cabinet) in the following step exceeds 240 V
when measuring between terminals L1 and L2, STOP and DO NOT proceed until the cause of the
higher voltages are determined. The frame will be damaged if the Main breaker is turned on with
excessive voltage on the inputs.
Measure from terminal L1 to terminal L2.
S Voltage should be in the nominal range from 208 to 240 Vac.
Remove external AC power from the frame by setting the facility circuit breaker to OFF.
Install the ACLC front panel assembly and secure with the four screws removed in step 1.
10
Apply external AC power to the frame by setting the facility circuit breaker to ON.
2-10
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Initial Power Up – continued
Figure 2-7: ACLC Voltage Measurement Probe Points – North American
L1
L2
= Ground
= Neutral
= Line 1
= Line 2
(ACLC front panel assembly
removed.)
08/01/2001
L1
L2
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
2-11
Initial Power Up – continued
Figure 2-8: ACLC Voltage Measurement Probe Points – International
G = Ground
N = Neutral
L1 = Line 1
(ACLC front panel assembly
removed.)
L1
Applying AC Power
Once the external AC power connections are verified, AC power may be
applied internally to the frame. Table 2-5 provides the procedure for
applying internal AC power.
Table 2-5: Applying Internal AC Power
Step
Action
Be sure the requirements of Table 2-4 for AC input power connection verification have been met.
Be sure all DC PDA circuit breakers are set to OFF (pulled out), all ACLC front–panel circuit
breakers are OFF (down), and all battery shelf circuit breakers are OFF (pulled out).
. . . continued on next page
2-12
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Initial Power Up – continued
Table 2-5: Applying Internal AC Power
Step
Action
Be sure the MAP power switch, TCP switch, and BATT TEST switch are all set to OFF.
If it has not already been done, set the facility circuit breaker supplying AC power to the frame
to ON.
Set the ACLC MAIN circuit breaker ON.
S For the North American cabinet:
Observe that all eight (8) green LEDs on the front of the ACLC are illuminated (Figure 2-4).
S For the International cabinet:
Observe that all four (4) green LEDs on the front of the ACLC are illuminated (Figure 2-4).
On the ACLC, set RECT. 1/3 and RECT. 2/4 branch circuit breakers ON. All the installed rectifier
modules (Figure 2-3) will start up, and the green DC and PWR LEDs should light on each.
Set the MAP power switch to ON. The MAP VOLT display should read 27.4 + 0.2 VDC with the
TCP switch OFF.
! CAUTION
Once power is applied to the MAP, be careful not to short either of the VOLT TEST POINTS to
ground. Failure to comply will result in severe damage to the MAP.
On the MAP, set the TCP switch (Figure 2-9) to ON. Verify no alarm LEDs are lighted on the MAP.
NOTE
Depending on battery compartment temperature, the rectifier voltage displayed on the MAP VOLT
indicator may change by as much as +1.5 V when the TCP is set to on.
Check the rectifier current bar graph displays (green LED display on the rectifier module). None
should be lighted at this time.
10
If batteries are fitted, set the ACLC HEATER circuit breaker to ON.
NOTE
The GFCI AC circuit breaker should remain OFF unless the GFCI outlet is in use.
25_C SET
COMM
SENSOR 2
SENSOR 1
TO DISABLE
SENSOR FAIL
Figure 2-9: Meter Alarm Panel (MAP)
TCP
SWITCH
BATT TEST
SWITCH
MASTER
VOLTAGE
ADJ.
VOLT TEST
POINTS
POWER
INDICATOR
POWER
SWITCH
SC4812ETL0015–2
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
2-13
Initial Power Up – continued
DC Power Application and
Testing
Table 2-6 lists the step–by–step instructions for applying DC power and
ensuring the DC power system components are correctly functioning.
Table 2-6: DC Power Application and Tests
Step
Action
Be sure all DC PDA and battery shelf circuit breakers are OFF (pulled out).
Be sure the procedures in Table 2-3 (if applicable) and Table 2-5 have been performed.
! CAUTION
When measuring voltage at the VOLT TEST POINTS, be careful not to short either of the test points
to ground. Failure to comply will result in severe damage to the MAP.
Measure voltage at the MAP VOLT TEST POINTS while pressing the 25° C SET button
(Figure 2-9). The voltage should read 27.4 + 0.2 Vdc. Adjust with the MASTER VOLTAGE ADJ. on
the MAP, if necessary, to obtain an indicated 27.4+0.2 Vdc. Release the 25° C SET button.
Depending on the ambient temperature, the voltage reading may now change by up to + 1.5 V
compared to the reading just measured. If it is cooler than 25_C, the voltage will be higher, and if it is
warmer than 25_C, the voltage will be lower.
Inside the battery compartment, measure the voltage between the cable connection point at the bottom
of the + (red) battery bus bar and chassis ground, observing that the polarity is correct. The voltage
should be the same as the measurement in step 4.
Measure the voltage between the + (red) and – (black) battery bus bars in the battery compartment.
Place the probe at the bottom of the bus bars where the cables are connected. The DC voltage should
measure the same as in step 4.
Close (push in) DC PDA MAIN BREAKER.
On the DC PDA(Figure 2-6), set the PS1 and PS2 circuit breakers to the ON position by pushing
them in one at a time while observing the rectifier output current indicated on the MAP AMP display.
– The display should indicate between 20 and 60 amps.
On the DC PDA), set the remaining circuit breakers to the ON position by pushing them in one at a
time in the following sequence:
LPA circuit breakers (four breakers, labeled 1A–1B through 3C–3D).
HEAT EXCHANGER circuit breakers (two breakers)
ETIB circuit breaker
PILOT BEACON circuit breaker
OPTION circuit breaker
. . . continued on next page
2-14
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Initial Power Up – continued
Table 2-6: DC Power Application and Tests
Step
10
Action
Confirm that the MAP AMP display continues to indicate between 20 and 60 amps during the initial
power application.
NOTE
No battery charging or heavy RF loading is present at this point.
11
If the frame is not equipped with the pilot beacon option, set the PILOT BEACON circuit breaker
to OFF.
Battery Charge Test
(Connected Batteries)
Table 2-7 lists the step–by–step instructions for testing the battery
charging performance.
Table 2-7: Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries)
Step
Action
Close the battery shelf circuit breakers (Figure 2-3) for connected batteries only. This process should
be completed quickly to avoid individual battery strings drawing excess charge current
NOTE
If the batteries are sufficiently discharged, the battery circuit breakers may not engage individually
due to the surge current. If this condition occurs, disconnect the batteries from the 27Vdc bus by
setting the MAP power switch to OFF, and then engage all the connected battery circuit breakers.
The MAP power switch should then be turned ON.
Using the clamp–on DC current probe and DMM, measure the current in each of the battery string
connections to the battery bus bars. The charge current may initially be high but should quickly
reduce in a few minutes if the batteries have a typical new–battery charge level.
NOTE
The MAP AMP display will indicate the total current output of the rectifiers during this procedure.
As an alternative, the bar graph meters on the AC rectifier modules can be used as a rough estimate of
the total battery charge current. Each rectifier module bar graph has eight (8) LED elements to
represent the output current. Each illuminated LED element indicates that approximately 12.5% (1/8
or 8.75 Amps) of an individual rectifier’s maximum current output (70 Amps) is flowing.
RECTIFIER BAR GRAPH EXAMPLE:
Question: A system fitted with three (3) rectifier modules each have three bar graph LED elements
illuminated. What is the total output current into the batteries?
Answer: Each bar graph is indicating approximately 12.5% of 70 amps, therefore, 3 x 8.75 equals
26.25 amps per rectifier. As there are three rectifiers, the total charge current is equal to (3 x 26.25 A)
78.75 amps.
This charge current calculation is only valid when the RF and LPA compartment electronics are not
powered on, and the RF compartment heat exchanger is turned off. This can only be accomplished if
the DC PDA MAIN BREAKER is set to OFF.
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
2-15
Initial Power Up – continued
Table 2-7: Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries)
Step
Action
The current in each string should be approximately equal (within + 5 amps).
Allow a few minutes to ensure that the battery charge current stabilizes before taking any further
action. Recheck the battery current in each string. If the batteries had a reasonable charge, the current
in each string should reduce to less than 5 amps.
Recheck the DC output voltage. It should remain the same as measured in step 4 of the frame DC
Power Application and Test (Table 2-6).
NOTE
If discharged batteries are installed, the MAP AMP display may indicate approximately 288 amps for
a two–carrier frame (four rectifiers) or 216 amps for a single–carrier frame (three rectifiers).
Alternately, all bar graph elements may be lighted on the rectifiers during the charge test. Either
indication shows that the rectifiers are at full capacity and are rapidly charging the batteries. It is
recommended in this case that the batteries are allowed to charge and stabilize as in the above step
before commissioning the site. This could take several hours.
Battery Discharge Test
Perform the test procedure in Table 2-8 only when the battery current is
less than 5 Amps per string. Refer to Table 2-7 on the procedures for
checking current levels.
Table 2-8: Battery Discharge Test
Step
Action
Turn the BATT TEST switch on the MAP ON (Figure 2-9). The rectifier output voltage and current
should decrease by approximately 10% as the batteries assume the load. Alarms for the MAP may
occur.
Measure the individual battery string current using the clamp–on DC current probe and DMM. The
battery discharge current in each string should be approximately the same (within + 5 amps).
Turn BATT TEST switch OFF.
CAUTION
Failure to turn off the MAP BATT TEST switch before
leaving the site will result in low battery capacity and
reduce battery life.
2-16
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Initial Power Up – continued
Power Removal Procedure
If it becomes necessary to remove power from the frame, follow the
procedure in Table 2-9.
Table 2-9: Power Removal
Step
Action
Set all DC PDA circuit breakers to OFF (pulled out) in the following sequence:
– LPAs
– Pilot beacon
– Heat exchanger
– ETIB
– Options
– PS1 and PS2
– MAIN BREAKER #1 (Internal)
n WARNING
The surge capacitors in the DC PDA will store a large electrical charge for long periods of time.
Failure to discharge these capacitors as specified in this step could result in serious personal injury or
damage to equipment.
On the DC PDA, set the PS1 and PS2 circuit breakers to ON (pushed in), and wait at least 30
seconds.
Set the DC PDA PS1 and PS2 circuit breakers to OFF.
Set the MAP power switch to OFF.
Set all ACLC circuit breakers to OFF (down) in the following sequence:
– GFI
– HEATER
– RECT. 1/3
– RECT. 2/4
– MAIN
Set the facility circuit breaker controlling external power to the frame to OFF.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
2-17
Initial Power Up – continued
Figure 2-10: Heat Exchanger Blower Assembly and Circuit
Breakers
Heat Exchanger
Assembly
Top (Internal) Blower
Blower
Power
Cord
Mounting
Bracket
Bottom (Ambient) Blower
Fan Module
Mounting
Bracket
Fan Module
Core
T–30 Screw
T–30 Screw
Blower
Power
Cord
DC PDA
1A
1C
3A
LPA
BLOWERS
HEAT EXCHANGER
CAUTION
LPA
3C
SHUT OFF BOTH BREAKERS
ONLY DURING HEAT EXCHANGER
MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR
30
30
30
30
15
1B
1D
3B
3D
PILOT
BEACON
25
25
MAIN BREAKER
300
10
15
PS1
PS2
50
50
ETIB
OPTIONS
PUSH BUTTON
TO RESET
LPA BLOWERS
OUT=OFF
IN=ON
Heat Exchanger
Blower Assembly
Circuit Breaker
Side View
SC4812ETL0016–3
2-18
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Chapter 3: Optimization/Calibration
Table of Contents
08/01/2001
Optimization/Calibration – Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optimization Process Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cell Site Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cell Site Data File (CDF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CDF Site Equipage Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS System Release Software Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-3
Preparing the LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LMF Installation and Update Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy CBSC CDF Files to the LMF Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Named HyperTerminal Connection for
MMI Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folder Structure Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
wlmf Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
cdma Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
bts–nnn Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
bts–nnn.cal File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
bts–nnn.cdf File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
cbsc File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
loads Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
version Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
code Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
data Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-5
3-7
3-9
3-9
3-9
3-9
3-10
3-10
3-11
3-11
3-11
3-11
3-12
Span Lines – Interface and Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T1/E1 Span Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolate BTS from T1/E1 Spans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T1/E1 Span Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure Optional Channel Service Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-14
3-14
3-14
3-15
3-15
3-17
LMF to BTS Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LMF to BTS Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-20
3-20
Using CDMA LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic CDMA LMF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CDMA LMF and Logical BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logging Into a BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-21
3-21
3-21
3-22
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table of Contents
– continued
Logging Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Establishing an MMI Communication Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-24
3-26
3-27
Pinging the Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pinging the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-28
3-28
Download the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify GLI ROM Code Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Download RAM Code and Data to MGLI and GLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Download RAM Code and Data to Non–GLI Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select CSM Clock Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enable CSMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enable MCCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-31
3-31
3-32
3-33
3-33
3-34
3-35
3-36
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) System Time . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low Frequency Receiver/
High Stability Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSM Frequency Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment Setup
(GPS & LFR/HSO Verification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS Initialization/Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LORAN–C Initialization/Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-37
3-37
3-37
3-39
3-39
3-40
3-45
Test Equipment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Test Equipment to the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Warm-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-47
3-47
3-49
Test Set Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manually Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab . . . . .
Automatically Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab . .
Calibrating Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Cables – Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Cables with a CDMA Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating TX Cables Using a Signal Generator and
Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and
Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Cable Loss Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting TX Coupler Loss Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-55
3-55
3-55
3-56
3-56
3-57
3-58
3-58
3-59
Bay Level Offset Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RF Path Bay Level Offset Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When to Calibrate BLOs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Path Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RX Path Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-64
3-64
3-64
3-64
3-65
3-65
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
3-60
3-61
3-62
3-63
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Table of Contents
08/01/2001
– continued
BLO Calibration Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment Setup: RF Path Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmit (TX) Path Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Calibration Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Download BLO Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Audit Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmit (TX) Path Audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Audit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create CAL File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-66
3-68
3-69
3-71
3-72
3-73
3-73
3-74
3-75
RFDS Setup and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RFDS Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RFDS Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RFDS TSU NAM Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Explanation of Parameters used when Programming the TSU NAM . .
Valid NAM Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Antenna Map Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set RFDS Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RFDS Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program TSU NAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-76
3-76
3-76
3-78
3-78
3-79
3-80
3-81
3-82
3-84
Alarms Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Reporting Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Testing Set–up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heat Exchanger Alarm Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Door Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Fail Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minor Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rectifier Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Rectifier Failure
(Three Rectifier System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiple Rectifier Failure
(Three Rectifier System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Rectifier Failure
(Four Rectifier System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiple Rectifier Failure
(Four Rectifier System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Over Temperature Alarm (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rectifier Over Temperature Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before Leaving the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-85
3-85
3-85
3-86
3-86
3-86
3-87
3-87
3-87
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-87
3-88
3-89
3-90
3-90
3-93
3-93
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Optimization/Calibration – Introduction
Introduction
This chapter provides procedures for downloading system operating
software, set up of the supported test equipment, CSM reference
verification/optimization, and transmit/receive path verification.
IMPORTANT
Before using the LMF, use an editor to view the
”CAVEATS” section in the ”readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmf
folder for any applicable information.
Optimization Process Overview
After a BTS is physically installed and the preliminary operations, such
as power up, have been completed, the CDMA LMF is used to calibrate
and optimize the BTS. The basic optimization process consists of the
following:
S Download MGLI2 (GLI2––1) with application code and data
and then enable MGLI2.
S Use the CDMA LMF status function and verify that all of the installed
devices of the following types respond with status information:
CSM2, BBX2, GLI2, and MCC (and TSU if RFDS is installed). If a
device is installed and powered up but is not responding and is
colored gray in the BTS display, the device is not listed in the CDF
file. The CDF file will have to be corrected before the device can be
accessed by CDMA LMF.
S Download device application code and data to all devices of the
following types:
– CSM2
– BBX2
– Remaining GLI2 (GLI2––2)
– MCC
S Download the RFDS TSIC (if installed).
S Verify the operation of the GPS and HSO signals.
S Enable the following devices (in the order listed):
– Secondary CSM (slot 2)
– Primary CSM (slot 1)
– All MCCs
S Using the CDMA LMF test equipment selection function, select the
test equipment to be used for the calibration.
S Calibrate the TX and RX test cables if they have not previously been
calibrated using the CDMA LMF that is going to be used for the
optimization/calibration. Cable calibration values can be entered
manually, if required.
S Connect the required test equipment for a full optimization.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-1
Optimization/Calibration – Introduction – continued
S Select all of the BBXs and all of the MCCs and use the full
optimization function. The full optimization function performs TX
calibration, BLO download, TX audit, all TX tests, and all RX tests
for all selected devices.
S If the TX calibration fails, repeat the full optimization for any failed
paths.
S If the TX calibration fails again, correct the problem that caused the
failure and repeat the full optimization for the failed path.
S If the TX calibration and audit portion of the full optimization passes
for a path but some of the TX or RX tests fail, correct the problem that
caused the failure and run the individual tests as required until all TX
and RX tests have passed for all paths.
Cell Site Types
Sites are configured as Omni/Omni or Sector/Sector (TX/RX). Each type
has unique characteristics and must be optimized accordingly.
Cell Site Data File (CDF)
IMPORTANT
Before using the CDMA LMF for optimization/ATP, the
correct bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf files for the BTS must be
obtained from the CBSC and put in a bts–# folder in the
LMF. Failure to use the correct CDF files can cause
unreliable or improper site operation. Failure to use the
correct CDF files to log into a live (traffic carrying) site
can shut down the site.
The CDF includes the following information:
S Download instructions and protocol
S Site specific equipage information
S SCCP shelf allocation plan
– BBX2 equipage (based on cell–site type) including redundancy
– CSM equipage including redundancy
– Multi Channel Card 24 or 8E (MCC24 or MCC8E) channel element
allocation plan. This plan indicates how the SCCP shelf is
configured, and how the paging, synchronization, traffic, and access
channel elements (and associated gain values) are assigned among
the (up to 4) MCC24s or MCC8Es in the shelf.
S CSM equipage including redundancy
S Effective Rated Power (ERP) table for all TX channels to antennas
respectively. Motorola System Engineering specifies the ERP of a
transmit antenna based on site geography, antenna placement, and
government regulations. Working from this ERP requirement, the
antenna gain, (dependent on the units of measurement specified) and
3-2
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Optimization/Calibration – Introduction – continued
antenna feed line loss can be combined to determine the required
power at the frame antenna connections. The corresponding BBX2
output level required to achieve that power level on any channel/sector
can then be determined based on Bay Level Offset (BLO) data
determined during the optimization process.
NOTE
Refer to the Figure 3-1 and the LMF Help function for
additional information on the layout of the LMF directory
structure (including CDF file locations and formats).
The CDF is normally obtained from the CBSC on a DOS formatted
diskette, or through a file transfer protocol (ftp), if the LMF computer
has ftp capability. Refer to the LMF Help function, and the LMF Help
function, for more information.
CDF Site Equipage Verification
If it has not already been done, review and verify the site equipage data
in the CDF with the actual site hardware and the site engineering
documentation. Use a text editor to view the CDF contents.
CAUTION
Use extreme care not to make any changes to the CDF
content while viewing the file. Changes to the CDF can
cause the site to operate unreliably or render it incapable of
operation.
CAUTION
Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap
while handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage
by ESD. Extreme care should be taken during the removal
and installation of any card/module. After removal, the
card/module should be placed on a conductive surface or
back into the anti–static bag in which it was shipped.
BTS System Release Software
Download
The System Release software (for example R2.15.x.x) being used by the
Base Station System (BSS) must be successfully downloaded to the BTS
processor boards before optimization can be performed. Device
initialization code is normally downloaded to the processor boards from
the CBSC. Device application code and data is loaded from the CDMA
LMF computer terminal.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-3
Preparing the LMF
Overview
Before optimization can be performed, the CDMA LMF must be
installed and configured on a computer platform meeting
Motorola–specified requirements (see Recommended Test Equipment
and Software in Chapter 1).
IMPORTANT
For the CDMA LMF graphics to display properly, the
computer platform must be configured to display more
than 256 colors. See the operating system software
instructions for verifying and configuring the display
settings.
Software and files for installing and updating the CDMA LMF are
provided on CD ROM disks. The following items must be available:
S CDMA LMF Program on CD ROM
S CDMA LMF Binaries on CD ROM
S Configuration Data File (CDF) for each supported BTS (on floppy
disk)
S CBSC File for each supported BTS (on floppy disk)
The following section provides information and instructions for
installing and updating CDMA LMF software and files.
LMF Installation and Update Procedures
NOTE
First Time Installation Sequence:
1. Install Java Runtime Environment (JRE)
2. Install U/WIN K–shell emulator
3. Install LMF software
4. Install BTS Binaries
5. Install/create BTS folders
Follow the procedure in Table 3-1 to:
1. Install the CDMA LMF program using the CDMA LMF CD ROM
2. Install binary files using the CDMA LMF CD ROM
Table 3-1: CD ROM Installation
n Step
Action
Insert the CDMA LMF CD ROM disk into your disk drive.
S If the Setup screen appears, follow the instructions displayed on the screen.
S If the Setup screen is not displayed, proceed to Step 2.
3-4
Click on the Start button
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Preparing the LMF – continued
Table 3-1: CD ROM Installation
n Step
Action
Select Run.
Enter d:\autorun in the Open box and click OK.
NOTE
(If applicable, replace the letter d with the correct CD ROM drive letter.)
Follow the directions displayed in the Setup screen.
Copy CBSC CDF Files to the
LMF Computer
Before logging on to a BTS with the CDMA LMF computer to execute
optimization/ATP procedures, the correct bts-#.cdf and
cbsc-#.cdf files must be obtained from the CBSC and put in a
bts-# folder in the CDMA LMF computer. This requires creating
versions of the CBSC CDF files on a DOS–formatted floppy diskette
and using the diskette to install the CDF files on the CDMA LMF
computer.
IMPORTANT
When copying CDF files, comply with the following to
prevent BTS login problems with the Windows LMF:
S The numbers used in the bts-#.cdf and
cbsc-#.cdf filenames must correspond to the
locally–assigned numbers for each BTS and its
controlling CBSC.
S The generic cbsc–1.cdf file supplied with the Windows
LMF will work with locally numbered BTS CDF files.
Using this file will not provide a valid optimization
unless the generic file is edited to replace default
parameters (e.g., channel numbers) with the operational
parameters used locally.
The procedure in Table 3-2 lists the steps required to transfer the CDF
files from the CBSC to the CDMA LMF computer. For any further
information, refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide (Motorola part
no. 68P64114A21) or the CDMA LMF Help screen.
Table 3-2: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMF Computer
Step
Action
Login to the CBSC workstation.
Insert a DOS–formatted floppy diskette in the workstation drive.
Type eject –q and press the Enter key.
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-5
Preparing the LMF – continued
Table 3-2: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMF Computer
Step
Action
Type mount and press the Enter key.
NOTE
S Look for the “floppy/no_name” message on the last line displayed.
S If the eject command was previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with a number.
Use the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed when performing step 7.
Change to the directory, where the files to be copied reside, by typing cd 
(e.g., cd bts–248) and pressing the Enter key.
Type ls and press the Enter key to display the list of files in the directory.
With Solaris versions of Unix, create DOS–formatted versions of the bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf files on
the diskette by entering the following command:
unix2dos  /floppy/no_name/
(e.g., unix2dos bts–248.cdf /floppy/no_name/bts–248.cdf).
NOTE
S Other versions of Unix do not support the unix2dos and dos2unix commands. In these cases, use
the Unix cp (copy) command. The copied files will be difficult to read with a DOS or Windows text
editor because Unix files do not contain line feed characters. Editing copied CDF files on the
CDMA LMF computer is, therefore, not recommended.
S Using cp, multiple files can be copied in one operation by separating each filename to be copied
with a space and ensuring the destination directory (floppy/no_name) is listed at the end of the
command string following a space (e.g., cp bts–248.cdf cbsc–6.cdf /floppy/no_name).
Repeat steps 5 through 7 for each bts–# which must be supported by the CDMA LMF computer.
When all required files have been copied to the diskette type eject and press the Enter key.
10
Remove the diskette from the CBSC drive.
11
If it is not running, start the Windows operating system on the CDMA LMF computer.
12
Insert the diskette containing the bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf files into the CDMA LMF computer.
13
Using MS Windows Explorer, create a corresponding bts–# folder in the wlmf\cdma directory for each
bts–#.cdf/cbsc–#.cdf file pair copied from the CBSC.
14
Use MS Windows Explorer to transfer the cbsc–#.cdf and bts–#.cdf files from the diskette to the
corresponding wlmf\cdma\bts–# folders created in step 13.
3-6
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Preparing the LMF – continued
Creating a Named
HyperTerminal Connection for
MMI Communication
Confirming or changing the configuration data of certain BTS Field
Replaceable Units (FRU) requires establishing an MMI communication
session between the CDMA LMF computer and the FRU. Using features
of the Windows operating system, the connection properties for an MMI
session can be saved on the CDMA LMF computer as a named Windows
HyperTerminal connection. This eliminates the need for setting up
connection parameters each time an MMI session is required to support
optimization.
Once the named connection is saved, a shortcut for it can be created on
the Windows desktop. Double–clicking the shortcut icon will start the
connection without the need to negotiate multiple menu levels.
Follow the procedures in Table 3-3 to establish a named HyperTerminal
connection and create a Windows desktop shortcut for it.
Table 3-3: Create HyperTerminal Connection
Step
Action
From the Windows Start menu, select:
Programs > Accessories
Select Communications, double click the Hyperterminal folder, and then double click on the
Hypertrm.exe icon in the window which opens.
NOTE
S If a Location Information Window appears, enter the required information, then click on the
Close button. (This is required the first time, even if a modem is not to be used.)
S If a You need to install a modem..... message appears, click on NO.
When the Connection Description box opens:
– Type a name for the connection being defined (e.g., MMI Session) in the Name: window,
– Highlight any icon preferred for the named connection in the Icon: chooser window, and
– Click OK.
NOTE
For CDMA LMF computer configurations where COM1 is used by another interface such as test
equipment and a physical port is available for COM2, select COM2 in the following step to prevent
conflicts.
From the Connect using: pick list in the Connect To box displayed, select Direct to Com 1 or Direct
to Com 2 for the RS–232 connection port, and click OK.
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-7
Preparing the LMF – continued
Table 3-3: Create HyperTerminal Connection
Step
Action
In the Port Settings tab of the COM# Properties window displayed, configure the RS–232 port
settings as follows:
Bits per second: 9600
Data bits: 8
Parity: None
Stop bits: 1
Flow control: None
Click OK.
Save the defined connection by selecting:
File > Save
Close the HyperTerminal window by selecting:
File > Exit
Click the Yes button to disconnect when prompted.
10
If the Hyperterminal folder window is still open, proceed to step 12.
11
Select Communications and double click the Hyperterminal folder.
12
Highlight the newly–created connection icon by clicking on it.
13
Right click and drag the highlighted connection icon to the Windows desktop and release the right
mouse button.
14
From the popup menu which appears, select Create Shortcut(s) Here.
15
If desired, reposition the shortcut icon for the new connection by dragging it to another location on the
Windows desktop.
16
Close the Hyperterminal folder window by selecting:
File > Close
3-8
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Preparing the LMF – continued
Folder Structure Overview
The CDMA LMF uses a wlmf folder that contains all of the essential
data for installing and maintaining the BTS. The following list outlines
the folder structure for CDMA LMF. Except for the bts-nnn folders,
these folders are created as part of the CDMA LMF installation.
Figure 3-1: CDMA LMF Folder Structure
(C:)
wlmf folder
cdma folder
BTS–nnn folders (A separate folder is
required for each BTS where bts–nnn is the
unique BTS number; for example, bts–163.)
loads folder
version folder (A separate folder is
required for each different version; for
example, a folder name 2.8.1.1.1.5.)
code folder
data folder
wlmf Folder
The wlmf folder contains the CDMA LMF program files.
cdma Folder
The cdma folder contains the bts–nnn folders and the loads folder. It also
contains a default cbsc–1.cdf file that can be copied to a bts–nnn folder
for use, if one cannot be obtained from the CBSC (Centralized Base
Station Controller) when needed.
bts–nnn Folders
Each bts–nnn folder contains a CAL file, a CDF file and a cbsc file for
the BTS. Other files required by CDMA LMF may also be located in the
bts–nnn folder. A bts–nnn folder must be created for each BTS that is to
be logged in to. The bts–nnn folder must be correctly named (for
example: bts–273) and must be placed in the cdma folder. Figure 3-2
shows an example of the file naming syntax for a BTS folder.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-9
Preparing the LMF – continued
Figure 3-2: BTS Folder Name Syntax Example
bts–259
BTS Number
bts–nnn.cal File
The CAL (Calibration) file contains the bay level offset data (BLO) that
is used for BLO downloads to the BBX devices. The CAL file is
automatically created and updated by the CDMA LMF when TX
calibration is performed. Figure 3-3 details the file name syntax for the
CAL file.
Figure 3-3: CAL File Name Syntax Example
bts–259.cal
BTS Number
bts–nnn.cdf File
The CDF file contains data that defines the BTS and data that is used to
download data to the devices. A CDF file must be placed in the
applicable BTS folder before the CDMA LMF can be used to log into
that BTS. CDF files are normally obtained from the CBSC using a
floppy disk. A file transfer protocol (ftp) method can be used if the
CDMA LMF computer has that capability. Figure 3-4 details the file
name syntax for the CDF file.
Figure 3-4: CDF Name Syntax Example
bts–259.cdf
BTS Number
3-10
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Preparing the LMF – continued
cbsc File
The cbsc–#.cdf (Centralized Base Station Controller) file contains data
for the BTS. If one is not obtained from the CBSC, a copy of the default
cbsc–1.cdf file located in the cdma folder can be used.
IMPORTANT
Using the generic cbsc–1.cdf file will not provide a valid
optimization unless the generic file is edited to replace
default parameters with local operational parameters (e.g.,
CDMA channel numbers must be changed from the default
“384” to those used locally by the BTS).
loads Folder
The loads folder contains the version folder(s). It does not contain any
files.
version Folder
The version folder(s) contains the code and data folders. It does not
contain any files. The name of version folders is the software version
number of the code files that are included in its code folder. Version
folders are created as part of the CDMA LMF installation and CDMA
LMF updates. Each time the CDMA LMF is updated, another version
folder will be created with the number of the software version for the
code files being installed.
code Folder
The code folder contains the binary files used to load code into the
devices. A unique binary code file is required for each device type in the
BTS to be supported with the CDMA LMF. Current version code files
for each supported device created in this folder from the CDMA LMF
CD ROM as part of the CDMA LMF installation/update process.
Figure 3-5 shows an example of the file naming syntax for a code load
file.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-11
Preparing the LMF – continued
Figure 3-5: Code Load File Name Syntax Example
bbx_ram.bin.0600
Device Type
Hardware bin number
If this number matches
the bin number of the
device, the code file will
automatically be used
for the download*
* The device bin number can be determined by using the Status
function after logging into a BTS. If the device does not have a
bin number, one of the following default numbers must be used.
GLI=0100
LCI=0300
MCC=0C00
BBX=0600
BDC=0700
CSM=0800
TSU=0900
LPAC=0B00
MAWI=0D00
If a code file with the correct version and bin numbers is not found, a file
selection window will appear.
data Folder
The data folder contains a DDS (Device Definition Structure) data file
for each supported device type. The DDS files are used to specify the
CDF file data that is used to download data to a device. Current version
DDS files for each supported device type are created in this folder from
the CDMA LMF CD ROM as part of the CDMA LMF installation or
update process. Figure 3-6 shows an example of the file naming syntax
for a code load file.
3-12
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Preparing the LMF – continued
Figure 3-6: DDS File Name Syntax Example
csm.dds.0800
Device Type
Device Bin Type Number
If this number matches the bin
number of the device, the DDS file
will automatically be used for the
download*
* The device bin number can be determined by using the Status
function after logging into a BTS. If the device does not have a
bin number, one of the following default numbers must be used.
GLI=0100
LCI=0300
MCC=0C00
BBX=0600
BDC=0700
CSM=0800
TSU=0900
LPAC=0B00
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-13
Span Lines – Interface and Isolation
T1/E1 Span Interface
IMPORTANT
At active sites, the OMC–R/CBSC must disable the BTS
and place it out of service (OOS). DO NOT remove the
span line cable conectors until the OMC–R/CBSC has
disabled the BTS.
Each frame is equipped with one 50–pair punchblock for spans,
customer alarms, remote GPS, and BTS frame alarms. See Figure 3-9
and refer to Table 3-5 for the physical location and punchdown location
information.
Before connecting the LMF computer to the frame LAN, the
OMC–R/CBSC must disable the BTS and place it OOS to allow the
LMF to control the BTS. This prevents the CBSC from inadvertently
sending control information to the BTS during LMF–based tests.
Isolate BTS from T1/E1 Spans
Once the OMC–R/CBSC has disabled the BTS, the spans must be
disabled to ensure the LMF will maintain control of the BTS. To disable
the spans, disconnect the cable connector for the BTS–to–CBSC
Transcoder span at the Span I/O card (Figure 3-7).
IMPORTANT
Figure 3-7: Disconnecting Span Lines
If the BTS is a multi–frame logical BTS, do not disconnect
the inter–frame span.
Span Line Cable
Connectors
4812ETL0020–1
3-14
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Span Lines – Interface and Isolation – continued
T1/E1 Span Isolation
Table 3-4 describes the action required for span isolation.
Table 3-4: T1/E1 Span Isolation
Step
Action
Have the OMCR/CBSC place the BTS OOS.
To disable the span lines, locate the connector for the span or spans which must be disabled and
remove the respective connector from the applicable SCCP cage Span I/O board (Figure 3-7).
Configure Optional Channel
Service Units
The M–PATH 537 Channel Service Unit (CSU) module provides
in–band SNMP–managed digital service access to T1 and fractional T1
lines. The M–PATH 437 Channel Service Unit (CSU) module provides
in–band SNMP–managed digital service access to E1 and fractional E1
lines. CSU modules units plug into the CSU shelf (see Figure 3-8).
The CSU shelf can support two M–PATH 537 or two M–PATH 437 CSU
modules. The 537 CSU module supports a single T1 span connection.
The 437 CSU module supports a single E1 span connection.
Remote M–PATH management is available via SNMP over an in–band
data link on the span line (using a facility data link or 8–64 Kbps of a
DS0 channel). The unit at the near end of the management path can be
an SNMP manager or another M–PATH CSU.
Programming of the M–PATH is accomplished through the DCE 9–pin
connector on the front panel of the CSU shelf. Manuals and a Microsoft
Windows programming disk are supplied with each unit.
For more information refer to M–PATH T1 Channel Service Unit User’s
Guide, ADC Kentrox part number 65–77538101 or the M–PATH E1
Channel Service Unit User’s Guide, ADC Kentrox part number TBD.
Setting the Control Port
Whichever control port is chosen, it must first be configured so the
control port switch settings match the communication parameters being
used by the control device. If using the rear–panel DTE control port, set
the SHELF ADDRESS switch SA5 to “up.” If using the rear–panel DCE
control port, position the SHELF ADDRESS switch down.
For more information, refer to the 2–Slot Universal Shelf Installation
Guide, ADC Kentrox part number 65–78070001.
Plug one of the cables listed below into the Control Port connectors:
Part Number
Description of Cable
01–95006–022 (six feet)
DB–9S to DB–9P
01–95010–022 (ten feet)
The control port cables can be used to connect the shelf to:
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-15
Span Lines – Interface and Isolation – continued
S A PC using the AT 9–pin interface
S A modem using the 9–pin connector
S Other shelves in a daisy chain
Figure 3-8: Rear and Front View of CSU Shelf
To/From
Network
To/From
GLI2
To/From
Network
To/From
GLI2
Rear View
SLOT 1
SLOT 2
DCE Connector
(Craft Port)
CSU Modules
REF. FW00212
Front View
3-16
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Span Lines – Interface and Isolation – continued
Alarm and Span Line Cable
Pin/Signal Information
See Figure 3-9 and refer to Table 3-5 for the physical location and
punchdown location information for the 50–pair punchblock.
Figure 3-9: 50–Pair Punchblock
TO ALARM
CONNECTOR
TO MODEM
CONNECTOR
STRAIN RELIEVE INCOMING
CABLE TO BRACKET WITH
TIE WRAPS
TO SPAN I/O
CONNECTOR
Frame Power Entry
Compartment
TO RGD/RGPS
CONNECTOR
LEGEND
1T = PAIR 1 – TIP
1R = PAIR 1 –RING
”
”
”
”
”
”
49T
49R
50T
50R
2R
2T
1R
1T
2R
2T
1R
1T
TOP VIEW OF PUNCHBLOCK
08/01/2001
SC4812ETL0010–1
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-17
Span Lines – Interface and Isolation – continued
Table 3-5: Punchdown Location for 50–Pair Punch Block
Site Component
Signal Name
NOT
USED
LFR/HSO
PILOT BEACON
CUSTOMER
OUTPUTS / INPUTS
LFR_HSO_GND
EXT_IPPS_POS
EXT_IPPS_NEG
CAL_+
CAL_–
LORAN_ +
LORAN_ –
Pilot Beacon Alarm – Minor
Pilot Beacon Alarm – Rtn
Pilot Beacon Alarm – Major
Pilot Beacon Control – NO
Pilot Beacon Control–COM
Pilot Beacon Control – NC
Customer Outputs 1 – NO
Customer Outputs 1 – COM
Customer Outputs 1 – NC
Customer Outputs 2 – NO
Customer Outputs 2 – COM
Customer Outputs 2 – NC
Customer Outputs 3 – NO
Customer Outputs 3 – COM
Customer Outputs 3 – NC
Customer Outputs 4 – NO
Customer Outputs 4–COM
Customer Outputs 4 – NC
Customer Inputs 1
Cust_Rtn_A_1
Customer Inputs 2
Cust_Rtn_A_2
Customer Inputs 3
Cust_Rtn_A_3
Customer Inputs 4
Cust_Rtn_A_4
Customer Inputs 5
Cust_Rtn_A_5
Customer Inputs 6
Cust_Rtn_A_6
Customer Inputs 7
Cust_Rtn_A_7
Customer Inputs 8
Punchdown
1T
1R
2T
2R
3T
3R
4T
4R
5T
5R
6T
6R
7T
7R
8T
8R
9T
9R
10T
10R
11T
11R
12T
12R
13T
13R
14T
14R
15T
15R
16T
16R
17T
17R
18T
18R
19T
19R
20T
20R
21T
21R
22T
22R
23T
23R
24T
24R
25T
25R
26T
26R
27T
Color
Orange
Red
White
Red
Green
Red
Blue
. . . continued on next page
3-18
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Span Lines – Interface and Isolation – continued
Table 3-5: Punchdown Location for 50–Pair Punch Block
Site Component
CUSTOMER
OUTPUTS / INPUTS
SPAN
RGPS
Phone Line
Miscellaneous
08/01/2001
Signal Name
Cust_Rtn_A_8
Customer Inputs 9
Cust_Rtn_A_9
Customer Inputs 10
Cust_Rtn_A_10
RVC_TIP_A
RVC_RING_A
XMIT_TIP_A
XMIT_RING_A
RVC_TIP_B
RVC_RING_B
XMIT_TIP_B
XMIT_RING_B
RVC_TIP_C
RVC_RING_C
XMIT_TIP_C
XMIT_RING_C
RVC_TIP_D
RVC_RING_D
XMIT_TIP_D
XMIT_RING_D
RVC_TIP_E
RVC_RING_E
XMIT_TIP_E
XMIT_RING_E
RVC_TIP_F
RVC_RING_F
XMIT_TIP_F
XMIT_RING_F
GPS_POWER_A+
GPS_POWER_A–
GPS_POWER_B+
GPS_POWER_B–
GPS_RX+
GPS_RX–
GPS_TX+
GPS_TX–
Signal Ground
Master Frame
GPS_lpps+
GPS_lpps–
Telco_Modem_T
Telco_Modem_R
Chasis Ground
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Punchdown
27R
28T
28R
29T
29R
30T
30R
31T
31R
32T
32R
33T
33R
34T
34R
35T
35R
36T
36R
37T
37R
38T
38R
39T
39R
40T
40R
41T
41R
42T
42R
43T
43R
44T
44R
45T
45R
46T
46R
47T
47R
48T
48R
49T
49R
50T
50R
Color
Red/Bk
Red
White/Bk
White
Green/Bk
Green
Blue/Bk
Blue
Yellow/Bk
Yellow
Brown/Bk
Brown
Orange/Bk
Orange
Violet/Bk
Violet
Gray/Bk
Gray
Pink/Bk
Pink
Tan/Bk
Tan
Bk/White
Bk
Blue
Blue/Bk
Yellow
Yellow/Bk
White
White/Bk
Green
Green/Bk
Red
Red/Bk
Brown
Brown/Bk
Cable Drain
PRELIMINARY
3-19
LMF to BTS Connection
LMF to BTS Connection
The CDMA LMF computer may be connected to the LAN A or B
connector located behind the frame lower air intake grill. Figure 3-10
below shows the general location of these connectors. LAN A is
considered the primary LAN.
Table 3-6: Connect the LMF to the BTS
Step
Action
To gain access to the LAN connectors, open the LAN cable and utility shelf access panel, then pull
apart the hook–and–loop fabric covering the BNC “T” connector (see Figure 3-10). If desired, slide
out the utility shelf for the LMF computer.
Connect the CDMA LMF computer to the LAN A (left–hand) BNC connector via PCMCIA Ethernet
Adapter.
NOTE
Xircom Model PE3–10B2 or equivalent can also be used to interface the CDMA LMF Ethernet
connection to the BTS frame connected to the PC parallel port, powered by an external AC/DC
transformer. In this case, the BNC cable must not exceed three feet in length.
* IMPORTANT
The LAN shield is isolated from chassis ground. The LAN shield (exposed portion of BNC connector)
must not touch the chassis during optimization.
Figure 3-10: LMF Connection Detail
NOTE:
Open LAN CABLE ACCESS
door. Pull apart hook–and–loop
fabric and gain access to the
LAN A or LAN B LMF BNC
connector.
ÁÁÁ
Á
LMF BNC “T” CONNECTIONS
ON LEFT SIDE OF FRAME
(ETHERNET “A” SHOWN;
ETHERNET “B” COVERED
WITH HOOK–AND–LOOP
FABRIC)
10BASET/10BASE2
CONVERTER CONNECTS
DIRECTLY TO BNC T
LMF COMPUTER
TERMINAL WITH
MOUSE
PCMCIA ETHERNET
ADPATER & ETHERNET
UTP ADAPTER
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE (RJ11
CONNECTORS)
115 VAC POWER
CONNECTION
SC4812ETL0012–2
3-20
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
68P09253A60
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Using CDMA LMF
Basic CDMA LMF Operation
The CDMA LMF allows the user to work in the two following operating
environments which are accessed using the specified desktop icons:
S Graphical User Interface (GUI) using the WinLMF icon
S Command Line Interface (CLI) using the WinLMF CLI icon
The GUI is the primary optimization and acceptance testing operating
environment. The CLI environment provides additional capability to the
user to perform manually controlled acceptance tests and audit the
results of optimization and calibration actions.
Basic operation of the CDMA LMF in either environment includes
performing the following:
Selecting and Deselecting BTS devices
Enabling devices
Disabling devices
Resetting devices
Obtaining device status
The following additional basic operation can be performed in a GUI
environment:
S Sorting a status report window
For detailed information on performing these and other CDMA LMF
operations, refer to the LMF Help function and the LMF CLI Reference;
68P09253A56.
IMPORTANT
Unless otherwise noted, LMF procedures in this manual
are performed using the GUI environment.
CDMA LMF and Logical BTS
An SC4812ET Lite logical BTS can consist of up to two SC4812ET Lite
frames. When the CDMA LMF is connected to a frame 1 Ethernet port
of a logical BTS, access is available to all devices in all of the frames
that make up the logical BTS. A logical BTS CDF file that includes
equipage information for all of the logical BTS frames and their devices
is required for proper LMF interface. A CBSC CDF file that includes
channel data for all of the logical BTS frames is also required.
The first frame of a logical BTS has a –1 suffix (for example,
BTS–812–1) and the second frame of the logical BTS is numbered with
the suffix, –101 (e. g. BTS–812–101). When the CDMA LMF is logged
into a BTS, a FRAME tab is displayed for each frame. If there is only
one frame for the BTS, there will only be one tab (e.g., FRAME–282–1
for BTS–282). If a logical BTS has more than one frame, there will be a
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-21
Using CDMA LMF – continued
separate FRAME tab for each frame(for example, FRAME–438–1, and
FRAME–438–101 for BTS–438 that has both frames). If an RFDS is
included in the CDF file, an RFDS tab (e.g., RFDS–438–1) will be
displayed.
Actions, such as ATP tests, can be initiated for selected devices in one or
more frames of a logical BTS. Refer to the CDMA LMF Select devices
help screen for information on how to select devices.
Logging Into a BTS
CAUTION
Be sure that the correct bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf file is
used for the BTS. These should be the CDF files that are
provided for the BTS by the CBSC. Failure to use the
correct CDF files can result in invalid optimization.
Failure to use the correct CDF files to log into a live
(traffic–carrying) site can shut down the site.
Logging into a BTS establishes a communications link between the BTS
and the CDMA LMF. You may be logged into one or more BTSs at a
time, but only one CDMA LMF may be logged into each BTS.
Before attempting to start the CDMA LMF computer and the CDMA
LMF software, confirm the CDMA LMF computer is properly connected
to the BTS (see Table 3-6). Follow the procedures in Table 3-7 to log
into a BTS.
Prerequisites
Before attempting to log into a BTS, ensure the following have been
completed:
S The CDMA LMF is correctly installed and prepared.
S A bts-nnn folder with the correct CDF and CBSC files exists.
S The CDMA LMF computer was connected to the BTS before starting
the Windows operating system and the CDMA LMF software. If
necessary, restart the computer after connecting it to the BTS in
accordance with Table 3-6 and Figure 3-10.
3-22
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Using CDMA LMF – continued
BTS Login from the GUI Environment
Follow the procedures in Table 3-7 to log into a BTS when using the
GUI environment.
Table 3-7: BTS GUI Login Procedure
n Step
Action
Start the CDMA LMF GUI environment by double–clicking on the WinLMF desktop icon (if the
LMF is not running).
NOTE
If a warning similar to the following is displayed, select No, shut down other LMF sessions which
may be running, and start the CDMA LMF GUI environment again:
The CLI handler is already running.
This may cause conflicts with the LMF.
Are you sure you want to start the application?
Yes
No
Click on Login tab (if not displayed).
Double click on CDMA (in the Available Base Stations pick list).
Click on the desired BTS number.
Click on the Network Login tab (if not already in the forefront).
Enter correct IP address (normally 128.0.0.2) for a field BTS, if not correctly displayed in the IP
Address box.
Type in the correct IP Port number (normally 9216) if not correctly displayed in the IP Port box.
Change the Multi-channel Preselector from the Multi-channel Preselector pick list (normally
MPC) to a device corresponding to your BTS configuration, if required.
Use a Tower Top Amplifier is not applicable to the SC4812ET Lite.
10
Click on Login. (A BTS tab with the BTS is displayed.)
NOTE
S If you attempt to log into a BTS that is already logged on, all devices will be gray.
S There may be instances where the BTS initiates a log out due to a system error (i.e., a device
failure).
S If the MGLI is OOS–ROM (blue), it must be downloaded with RAM code before other devices
can be seen.
S If the MGLI is OOS–RAM (yellow), it must be enabled before other installed devices can be
seen.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-23
Using CDMA LMF – continued
BTS Login from the CLI Environment
Follow the procedures in Table 3-8 to log into a BTS when using the
CLI environment.
IMPORTANT
If the CLI and GUI environments are to be used at the
same time, the GUI must be started first and BTS login
must be performed from the GUI. Refer to Table 3-7 to
start the GUI environment and log into a BTS.
Table 3-8: BTS CLI Login Procedure
n Step
Action
Double–click the WinLMF CLI desktop icon (if the LMF CLI environment is not already
running).
NOTE
If a BTS was logged into under a GUI session before the CLI environment was started, the CLI
session will be logged into the same BTS, and step 2 is not required.
At the /wlmf prompt, enter the following command:
login bts–
host=
port=
where:
host = MGLI card IP address (defaults to address last logged into for this BTS or 128.0.0.2 if this
is first login to this BTS)
port = IP port of the BTS (defaults to port last logged into for this BTS or 9216 if this is first login
to this BTS)
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
LMF>
13:08:18.882 Command Received and Accepted
COMMAND=login bts–33
13:08:18.882 Command In Progress
13:08:21.275 Command Successfully Completed
REASON_CODE=”No Reason”
Logging Out
Logging out of a BTS is accomplished differently for the GUI and CLI
operating environments.
3-24
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Using CDMA LMF – continued
IMPORTANT
The GUI and CLI environments use the same connection to
a BTS. If a BTS is logged into in both the GUI and CLI
environments at the same time, logging out of the BTS in
either environment will log out of it for both. When either
a login or logout is performed in the CLI window, there is
no GUI indication that the login or logout has occurred.
Logging Out of a BTS from the GUI Environment
Follow the procedure in Table 3-9 to logout of a BTS when using the
GUI environment.
Table 3-9: BTS GUI Logout Procedure
n Step
Action
Click on Select on the BTS tab menu bar.
Click the Logout item in the pulldown menu (a Confirm Logout pop-up message will appear).
Click on Yes (or press the Enter key) to confirm logout. The Login tab will appear.
NOTE
If a logout was previously performed on the BTS from a CLI window running at the same time as
the GUI, a Logout Error popup message will appear stating the system could not log out of the
BTS. When this occurs, the GUI must be exited and restarted before it can be used for further
operations.
If a Logout Error popup message appears stating that the system could not log out of the Base
Station because the given BTS is not logged in, click OK and proceed to step 5.
Select File > Exit in the window menu bar, click Yes in the Confirm Logout popup, and click
Yes in the Logout Error popup which appears again.
If further work is to be done in the GUI, restart it.
NOTE
S The Select menu on the BTS tab will only log you out of the displayed BTS.
S You can also log out of all BTS sessions and exit CDMA LMF by clicking on the File selection
in the menu bar and selecting Exit from the File menu list. A Confirm Logout pop–up
message will appear.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-25
Using CDMA LMF – continued
Logging Out of a BTS from the CLI Environment
Follow the procedure in Table 3-10 to logout of a BTS when using the
CLI environment.
Table 3-10: BTS CLI Logout Procedure
n Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
If the BTS is also logged into from a GUI running at the same time and further work must be done
with it in the GUI, proceed to step 2.
Logout of a BTS by entering the following command:
logout bts–
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
LMF>
13:24:51.028 Command Received and Accepted
COMMAND=logout bts–33
13:24:51.028 Command In Progress
13:24:52.04
Command Successfully Completed
REASON_CODE=”No Reason”
If desired, close the CLI interface by entering the following command:
exit
A response similar to the following will be displayed before the window closes:
Killing background processes....
Establishing an MMI
Communication Session
For those procedures which require MMI communication between the
CDMA LMF and BTS FRUs, follow the procedures in Table 3-11 to
initiate the communication session.
Figure 3-11 illustrates common equipment connections for the CDMA
LMF computer. For specific connection locations on FRUs, refer to the
illustration accompanying the procedures which require the MMI
communication session.
Table 3-11: Establishing MMI Communication
Step
Action
Connect the CDMA LMF computer to the equipment as detailed in the applicable procedure which
requires the MMI communication session.
Start the named HyperTerminal connection for MMI sessions by double clicking on its Windows
desktop shortcut.
. . . continued on next page
3-26
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Using CDMA LMF – continued
Table 3-11: Establishing MMI Communication
Step
Action
NOTE
If a Windows desktop shortcut was not created for the MMI connection, access the connection from
the Windows Start menu by selecting:
Programs > Accessories > Hyperterminal > HyperTerminal > 
Once the connection window opens, establish MMI communication with the BTS FRU by pressing
the CDMA LMF computer Enter key until the prompt identified in the applicable procedure is
obtained.
Figure 3-11: CDMA LMF Computer Common MMI Connections
To FRU MMI port
8–PIN
NULL MODEM
BOARD
(TRN9666A)
8–PIN TO 10–PIN
RS–232 CABLE (P/N
30–09786R01)
CDMA LMF
COMPUTER
RS–232 CABLE
COM1
OR
COM2
DB9–TO–DB25
ADAPTER
Online Help
Task oriented online help is available in CDMA LMF by clicking on
Help in the menu bar.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-27
Pinging the Processors
Pinging the BTS
For proper operation, the integrity of the Ethernet LAN A and B links
must be be verified. Figure 3-12 represents a typical BTS Ethernet
configuration for the SC4812ET Lite with an expansion frame. The
drawing depicts cabling and termination for both the A and B LANs.
Ping is a program that sends request packets to the LAN network
modules to get a response from the specified “target” module.
Follow the steps in Table 3-12 to ping each processor (on both LAN A
and LAN B) and verify LAN redundancy is working properly.
CAUTION
Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap
while handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage
by Electro–Static Discharge (ESD).
Figure 3-12: BTS Ethernet LAN Interconnect Diagram
IN
TRIAX
TERMINATOR
OUT
50Ω
TRIAX
TERMINATOR
50Ω
SIGNAL
GROUND
SIGNAL
GROUND
SC4812ET Lite
(MASTER)
SC4812ET Lite
(EXPANSION)
FRAME GROUND
OUT
IN
TRIAX
TERMINATOR
50Ω
SIGNAL
GROUND
TRIAX
TERMINATOR
50Ω
SIGNAL
GROUND
SIGNAL
GROUND
SC4812ETL0013–4
3-28
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Pinging the Processors – continued
IMPORTANT
The Ethernet LAN A and B cables and/or terminations
must be installed on each frame/enclosure external LAN
connector before performing this test. All other processor
board LAN connections are made through the backplanes.
Table 3-12: Pinging the Processors
Step
Action
If this is a first–time communication with a newly–installed frame or a GLI2 which has been replaced,
perform the procedure in Table 6-3 and then return to step 2.
Be sure uncabled LAN A and B IN and OUT connectors in the power entry compartment (rear of
frame – Figure 3-9 and Figure 3-12) are terminated with 50 Ω loads.
If it has not already been done, interface the LMF computer to the BTS (refer to Table 3-6 and
Figure 3-10.)
If it has not already been done, start a GUI LMF session and log into the BTS ( refer to Table 3-7).
In the power entry compartment, remove the 50Ω termination on the frame LAN B IN connector. The
CDMA LMF session should remain active. Replace the 50Ω terminator on the BTS frame LAN B IN
connector.
From the Windows desktop, click the Start button and select Run.
In the Open box, type ping and the GLI2 IP address (for example, ping 128.0.0.2).
NOTE
128.0.0.2 is the default IP address for the GLI2 in field BTS units.
Click on OK.
If the targeted module responds, a DOS window will appear with a display similar to the following:
Reply from 128.0.0.2: bytes=32 time=3ms TTL=255
S If the device responds, proceed to step 18.
If there is no response the following is displayed:
Request timed out
S If the GLI2 fails to respond, it should be reset and re–pinged. If it still fails to respond, typical
problems would be: failure of the CDMA LMF to login, shorted BNC to inter-frame cabling, open
cables, crossed A and B link cables, or the GLI2 itself.
10
Logout of the BTS as described in Table 3-9, exit from the CDMA LMF program, and restart the
Windows operating system on the CDMA LMF computer.
11
Restart the CDMA LMF GUI program as described in LMF Help function, and log into the BTS as
described in Table 3-7.
12
Perform steps 6 through 9 again.
S If the device responds, proceed to step 18.
If there is still no response,proceed to step 13.
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-29
Pinging the Processors – continued
Table 3-12: Pinging the Processors
Step
Action
13
If ping was unsuccessful after restarting the CDMA LMF computer, press the MGLI front panel reset
pushbutton and perform steps 6 through 9 again.
14
NOTE
Refer to Table 6-1 if ping was unsuccessful after resetting the MGLI.
15
After the BTS has been successfully pinged, be sure the 50Ω termination was replaced on the BTS
frame LAN B IN connector in the power entry compartment (Figure 3-12). Disconnect the LMF cable
from the LAN shelf LAN A connector, and connect it to LAN B (right–hand connector) using a
BNC–female–to–BNC–female adapter (refer to Figure 3-10).
16
In the power entry compartment, remove the 50Ω termination on the BTS frame LAN A IN connector.
17
Repeat steps 5 through 8 using LAN B.
18
After the BTS has been successfully pinged on the secondary LAN, replace the 50Ω termination on
the frame LAN A IN connector in the power entry compartment.
19
Disconnect the LMF cable from the LAN shelf LAN B and connect it to LAN A using a
BNC-female-to-BNC-female adapter.
20
Remove and replace the 50Ω termination on the LAN B IN connector to force the MGLI to switch to
primary LAN A.
21
Repeat steps 5 through 8 to ensure proper primary LAN operation.
3-30
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Download the BTS
Overview
Before a BTS can operate, each equipped device must contain device
initialization (ROM) code. ROM code is loaded in all devices during
manufacture or factory repair. Device application (RAM) code and data
must be downloaded to each equipped device by the user before the BTS
can be made fully functional for the site where it is installed.
ROM Code
Downloading ROM code to BTS devices from the CDMA LMF is NOT
routine maintenance or a normal part of the optimization process. It is
only done in unusual situations where the resident ROM code in the
device does not match the release level of the site operating software
AND the CBSC can not communicate with the BTS to perform the
download. An example would be a BTS loaded with Release 9.2
software where a GLI loaded with Release 2.8.1 ROM code must be
installed to replace a malfunctioning MGLI.
Before ROM code can be downloaded from the CDMA LMF, the correct
ROM code file for each device to be loaded must exist on the LMF
computer. ROM code must be manually selected for download.
ROM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After the
download is started, the device being downloaded will change to
OOS–ROM (blue). The device will remain OOS–ROM (blue) when the
download is completed. The same Revision–level RAM code must then
be downloaded to the device. For example, if Release 2.9.2.1.1 ROM
code is downloaded, Release 2.9.2.1.1 RAM code must be downloaded.
Procedures to load ROM code are located in Appendix G.
RAM Code
Before RAM code can be downloaded from the CDMA LMF, the correct
RAM code file for each device must exist on the LMF computer. RAM
code can be automatically or manually selected depending on the Device
menu item chosen and where the RAM code file for the device is stored
in the CDMA LMF file structure. The RAM code file will be selected
automatically if the file is in the \lmf\cdma\loads\n.n.n.n\code folder
(where n.n.n.n is the version number of the download code that matches
the “NextLoad” parameter of the CDF file). The RAM code file in the
code folder must have the correct hardware bin number.
RAM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After the
download is started, the device being loaded will change to OOS-ROM
(blue). When the download is completed successfully, the device will
change to OOS-RAM (yellow). When code is downloaded to an MGLI
or GLI, the CDMA LMF automatically also downloads data and then
enables the MGLI. When enabled, the MGLI will change to INS (green).
For non–GLI devices, data must be downloaded after RAM code is
downloaded. To download data, the device state must be OOS–RAM
(yellow).
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-31
Download the BTS – continued
RAM code downloading requires a few minutes. After the download
starts, the non–GLI device being loaded changes to OOS–ROM (blue). If
the download is completed successfully, the non–GLI device changes to
OOS–RAM (yellow).
The devices to be loaded with RAM code and data are:
S Master Group Line Interface (MGLI2)
S Redundant GLI (GLI2)
S Clock Syncronization Module (CSM) (Only if new revision code must
be loaded)
S Multi Channel CDMA (MCC24 or MCC8E) card
S Broadband Transceiver (BBX2)
S RFDS Test Subscriber Interface Card (TSIC), if equipped
IMPORTANT
The MGLI must be successfully downloaded with RAM
code and data, and in INS (green) status before
downloading any other device. The RAM code download
process for an MGLI automatically downloads data and
then enables the MGLI.
Verify GLI ROM Code Loads
Devices should not be loaded with RAM code which is for a different
system release than the ROM code with which they are loaded. Before
downloading RAM code and data to the processor cards, follow the
procedure in Table 3-13 to verify the GLI devices are loaded with the
correct ROM code for the system release used by the BSS.
Table 3-13: Verify GLI ROM Code Loads
Step
Action
If it has not already been done, start a GUI LMF session and log into the BTS ( refer to Table 3-7).
Select all GLI devices by clicking on them, and select Device > Status from the menu bar.
In the status report window which opens, note the number in the ROM Ver column for each GLI2.
S The system release number will be the first two decimal divisions of the number; for example, the
number 2.15.0.0.3 would be for System Release 2.15, and 2.9.2.2.34 would be for System Release
2.9.
If the ROM code loaded in the GLIs is not for the correct system release, log out of the BTS,
disconnect the CDMA LMF computer, reconnect the span lines as described in Table 5-7, and have the
CBSC download the correct ROM code version to the BTS devices.
When the GLIs have the correct ROM load for the system release being used, be sure the span lines
are disabled as outlined in Table 3-4 and proceed to downloading RAM code and data.
3-32
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Download the BTS – continued
Download RAM Code and Data
to MGLI and GLI
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-14 to download the RAM code and
data to the MGLI and other installed GLI devices.
Prerequisites
S Prior to performing these procedures, ensure a code file exists for each
of the devices to be loaded.
S The CDMA LMF computer is connected to the BTS (refer to
Table 3-6), and is logged in using the GUI environment (refer to
Table 3-7).
Table 3-14: Download and Enable MGLI and GLI Devices
Step
Action
From the Util pull down menu, select Tools, then Update NextLoad.
Select the correct code version for the system release being used and click Save.
Download code to the MGLI by clicking on the device.
From the Device pull down menu, select Download Code.
A status report is displayed confirming change in the device(s) status. Click OK to close the status
window. (The MGLI will automatically be downloaded with data and enabled.)
Once the MGLI is enabled, load and enable additional installed GLIs by clicking on the devices and
repeating step 4.
Click OK to close the status window for the additional GLI devices.
Download RAM Code and Data
to Non–GLI Devices
Downloads to non–GLI devices can be performed individually for each
device or all installed devices can be downloaded with one action. RAM
code and data are downloaded to non–GLI devices in separate steps.
IMPORTANT
CSM devices are RAM code–loaded at the factory. RAM
code is downloaded to CSMs only if a newer software
version needs to be loaded.
NOTE
When downloading to multiple devices, the download may
fail for some of the devices (a time–out occurs). These
devices can be loaded individually after completing the
multiple download.
Follow the steps in Table 3-15 to download RAM code and data to
non–GLI devices.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-33
Download the BTS – continued
Table 3-15: Download RAM Code and Data to Non–GLI Devices
Step
Action
Select the target CSM, MCC, and BBX device(s).
From the Device pull down menu, select Download Code.
A status report is displayed that shows the results of the download for each selected device.
Click OK to close the status report window when downloading is completed.
NOTE
After a BBX, CSM, or MCC device is successfully loaded with RAM code and has changed to the
OOS–RAM state (yellow), the status LED should be rapidly flashing GREEN.
To download data, select the target CSM and MCC device(s).
From the Device pull down menu, select Download Data.
A status report is displayed that shows the results of the download for each selected device.
Click OK to close the status report window when downloading is completed.
Select CSM Clock Source
A CSM can have three different clock sources. The Select CSM Source
function can be used to select the clock source for each of the three
inputs. This function is only used if the clock source for a CSM needs to
be changed. The Clock Source function provides the following clock
source options.
Local GPS
Remote GPS
HSO (only for source 2 & 3)
LFR (only for source 2 & 3)
10 MHz (only for source 2 & 3)
NONE (only for source 2 & 3)
Prerequisites
MGLI=INS_ACT (green), CSM= OOS_RAM (yellow) or INS_ACT
(green)
Table 3-16: Select CSM Clock Source
Step
Action
Select the applicable CSM(s).
Click on the Device menu.
Click on the Clock Source menu item.
Click on the Select menu item. A clock source selection window is displayed.
Select the applicable clock source in the Clock Reference Source pick lists. Uncheck the related
check box if you do not want the displayed pick list item to be used.
. . . continued on next page
3-34
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Download the BTS – continued
Table 3-16: Select CSM Clock Source
Step
Action
Click on the OK button. A status report window is displayed showing the results of the selection
action.
Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
Enable CSMs
Each BTS CSM system features two CSM boards per site. In a typical
operation, the primary CSM locks its Digital Phase Locked Loop
(DPLL) circuits to GPS signals. These signals are generated by either an
on–board GPS module (RF–GPS) or a remote GPS receiver (R–GPS).
The GPS receiver interfaced to CSM 1 is used as the primary timing
reference and synchronizes the entire cellular system. CSM 2 provides
clock syncronization back–up, but does not have a GPS receiver.
The BTS may be equipped with a LORAN–C Low Frequency Receiver
(LFR), a High Stability Oscillator (HSO), or external 10 MHz Rubidium
source which the CSM can use as a secondary timing reference. In all
cases, the CSM monitors and determines what reference to use at a given
time.
IMPORTANT
For RF–GPS, verify the CSM configured with the GPS
receiver “daughter board” is installed in the frame’s CSM 1
slot before continuing.
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-17 to enable the CSMs installed in
the SCCP shelves.
Table 3-17: Enable CSMs
Step
Action
NOTE
If equipped with two CSMs, enable CSM–2 first.
Click on the target CSM.
From the Device pull down, select Enable.
A status report is displayed confirming change in the device(s) status.
Click OK to close the status report window.
NOTE
S CSM 1 houses the GPS receiver. The enable sequence can take up to one hour (see below).
S FAIL may be shown in the status report table for enable action. If Waiting For Phase Lock is shown
in the Description field, the CSM changes to the Enabled state after phase lock is achieved.
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-35
Download the BTS – continued
Table 3-17: Enable CSMs
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
The GPS satellite system satellites are not in a geosynchronous orbit and are maintained and operated
by the United States Department of Defense (DOD). The DOD periodically alters satellite orbits;
therefore, satellite trajectories are subject to change. A GPS receiver that is INS contains an “almanac”
that is updated periodically to take these changes into account.
If a GPS receiver has not been updated for a number of weeks, it may take up to an hour for the GPS
receiver “almanac” to be updated.
Once updated, the GPS receiver must track at least four satellites and obtain (hold) a 3–D position fix
for a minimum of 45 seconds before the CSM will come in service. (In some cases, the GPS receiver
needs to track only one satellite, depending on accuracy mode set during the data load).
NOTE
S If equipped with two CSMs, CSM–1 should be bright green (INS–ACT) and CSM–2 should be
dark green(INS–STB)
S If more than an hour has passed, refer to CSM Verification, see Figure 3-13 and Table 3-20 to
determine the cause.
After the CSMs have been successfully enabled, be sure the PWR/ALM LEDs are steady green
(alternating green/red indicates the card is in an alarm state).
Enable MCCs
This procedure configures the MCC and sets the “tx fine adjust”
parameter. The “tx fine adjust” parameter is not a transmit gain setting,
but a timing adjustment that compensates for the processing delay in the
BTS (approximately 3 mS).
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-18 to enable the MCCs installed in
the SCCP shelves.
IMPORTANT
The MGLI and CSM must be downloaded and enabled,
prior to downloading and enabling the MCC.
Table 3-18: Enable MCCs
Step
Action
Click on the target MCC(s) or from the Select pull down menu choose All MCCs.
From the Device menu, select Enable
A status report is displayed confirming change in the device(s) status.
Click OK to close the status report window.
3-36
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification
Clock Synchronization
Manager (CSM) System Time
The primary function of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM)
cards is to maintain CDMA system time. The CSM card in SCCP shelf
slot CSM–1 is the primary timing source while the card in slot CSM–2
provides redundancy. The second generation CSM card (CSM2) is
required when using the remote GPS receiver (R–GPS). R–GPS uses a
GPS receiver in the antenna head that has a digital output to the CSM2
card. A CSM2 card can have a local GPS receiver daughter card to
support an RF–GPS signal.
Each CSM2 card features a temperature–stablized, crystal oscillator that
provides 19.6608 MHz clock, even second pulse, and 3 MHz reference
signals to the synchronization source selected from the following (refer
to Table 3-20 for source selection/verification procedures):
S GPS: local/RF–GPS or remote/R–GPS
S LORAN–C Low Frequency Receiver (LFR) or High Stability
Oscillator (HSO)
S External reference oscillator sources
CDMA Clock Distribution Cards (CCDs) buffer and distribute
even–second reference and 19.6608 MHz clock signals from the CSM
cards. CCD 1 is married to the card in slot CSM–1, and CCD 2 is
married to the card in slot CSM–2.
The BTS switches between the primary and redundant units (card slots
CSM–1 and CSM–2, respectively) upon failure or command. A failure
in CSM–1 or CCD 1 will cause the system to switch to the
CSM–2–CCD 2 redundant card pair.
Fault management has the capability of switching between the GPS
synchronization source and the LFR/HSO backup source in the event of
a GPS receiver failure in CSM–1. During normal operation, the card in
CSM–1 selects GPS as the primary timing source (Table 3-20). The
source selection can also be overridden via the CDMA LMF or by the
system software.
In addition to providing GPS synchronization to the LFR or HSO
back–up sources, synchronization between the primary and redundant
CSM–CCD pairs increases reliability.
Low Frequency Receiver/
High Stability Oscillator
The CSM performs the overall configuration and status monitoring
functions of the LFR/HSO. In the event of GPS failure, the LFR/HSO is
capable of maintaining synchronization initially established by the GPS
reference signal.
The LFR requires an active external antenna to receive LORAN–C RF
signals. Timing pulses are derived from this signal, which is
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-37
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
synchronized to Universal Time Coordinates (UTC) and GPS time. The
LFR can maintain system time indefinately after initial GPS lock.
The HSO is a high stability 10 MHz oscillator with the necessary
interface to the CSMs. The HSO is typically installed in those
geographical areas not covered by the LORAN–C system. Since the
HSO is a free–standing oscillator, system time can only be maintained
for 24 hours after 24 hours of GPS lock.
Upgrades and Expansions: LFR2/HSO2/HSOX
LFR2/HSO2 (second generation cards) both export a timing signal to the
expansion or logical BTS frames. The associated expansion or logical
frames require an HSO–expansion (HSOX) whether the starter frame has
an LFR2 or an HSO2. The HSOX accepts input from the starter frame
and interfaces with the CSM cards in the expansion frame. LFR and
LFR2 use the same source code in source selection (Table 3-20). HSO,
HSO2, and HSOX use the same source code in source selection
(Table 3-20).
NOTE
Allow the base site and test equipment to warm up for
60 minutes after any interruption in oscillator power. CSM
card warm-up allows the oscillator oven temperature and
oscillator frequency to stabilize prior to test. Test
equipment warm-up allows the Rubidium standard
timebase to stabilize in frequency before any measurements
are made.
3-38
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
CSM Frequency Verification
The objective of this procedure is the initial verification of the Clock
Synchronization Module (CSM) cards before performing the RF path
verification tests.
Test Equipment Setup
(GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-19 to set up test equipment.
Table 3-19: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)
Step
1a
Action
For local GPS (RF–GPS): Verify a CSM card with a GPS receiver is installed in the primary CSM
slot, CSM–1, and that CSM–1 is INS.
NOTE
This is verified by checking the card ejectors for kit number SGLN1145 on the card in slot 1.
1b
For Remote GPS (RGPS): Verify a CSM2 card is installed in primary slot CSM–1 and that CSM–1 is
INS.
NOTE
This is verified by checking the card ejectors for kit number SGLN4132CC or subsequent.
Remove CSM–2 (if installed) and connect a serial cable from the LMF COM 1 port (via null modem
card) to the MMI port on CSM–1 (see Figure 3-13).
Reinstall CSM–2.
Start an MMI communication session with CSM–1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (see
Table 3-11) .
When the terminal screen appears press the Enter key until the CSM> prompt appears.
CAUTION
In the power entry compartment, connect the GPS antenna
to the RF GPS connector ONLY. Damage to the GPS
antenna and/or receiver can result if the GPS antenna is
inadvertently connected to any other RF connector.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-39
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
Figure 3-13: CSM MMI Terminal Connection
REFERENCE
OSCILLATOR
CSM card shown
removed from frame
MMI SERIAL
PORT
EVEN SECOND
TICK TEST POINT
REFERENCE
GPS RECEIVER
ANTENNA INPUT
ANTENNA COAX
CABLE
GPS RECEIVER
19.6 MHZ TEST
POINT REFERENCE
(NOTE 1)
NULL MODEM
BOARD
(TRN9666A)
9–PIN TO 9–PIN
RS–232 CABLE
FW00372
LMF
NOTEBOOK
DB9–TO–DB25
ADAPTER
RS–232 SERIAL
MODEM CABLE
COM1
NOTES:
1. One LED on each CSM:
Green = IN–SERVICE ACTIVE
Fast Flashing Green = OOS–RAM
Red = Fault Condition
Flashing Green & Red = Fault
GPS Initialization/Verification
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
S The primary CSM and HSO (if equipped) has been warmed up for at
least 15 minutes.
S The CDMA LMF computer is connected to the MMI port of the
primary CSM as shown in Figure 3-13.
S A HyperTerminal session has been started (Table 3-11), and the CSM>
prompt is present in the HyperTerminal window (Table 3-19).
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-20 to initialize and verify proper
GPS receiver functioning.
3-40
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
Table 3-20: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
To verify that Clock alarms (0000), Dpll is locked and has a reference source, and
GPS self test passed messages are displayed within the report, issue the following MMI
command
bstatus
– The system will display a response similiar to the following:
CSM Status INS:ACTIVE Slot A Clock MASTER.
BDC_MAP:000, This CSM’s BDC Map:0000
Clock Alarms (0000):
DPLL is locked and has a reference source.
GPS receiver self test result: passed
Time since reset 0:33:11, time since power on: 0:33:11
Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to display the current status of the Loran and GPS
receivers:
sources
– When equipped with LFR, the system will generate a response similar to the following:
N Source Name Type
TO Good Status
Last Phase Target Phase Valid
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
0 LocalGPS
Primary 4
YES
Good
Yes
1 LFR CHA
Secondary 4
YES
Good
–2013177
–2013177
Yes
2 Not Used
Current reference source number: 0
– When equipped with HSO, the system will generate a response similar to the following:
Num Source Name Type
TO Good
Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Local GPS
Primary 4
Yes
Good
Yes
HSO
Backup
No
N/A
timed–out*
Timed–out* No
*NOTE “Timed–out” should only be displayed while the HSO is warming up. “Not–Present” or
“Faulty” should not be displayed. If the HSO does not appear as one of the sources, then configure the
HSO as a back–up source by entering the following command at the CSM> prompt:
ss 1 12
After a maximum of 15 minutes, the Rubidium oscillator should reach operational temperature and the
LED on the HSO should now have changed from red to green. After the HSO front panel LED has
changed to green, enter sources  at the CSM> prompt. Verify that the HSO is now a valid source
by confirming that the bold text below matches the response of the “sources” command.
The HSO should be valid within one (1) minute, assuming the DPLL is locked and the HSO rubidium
oscillator is fully warmed.
Num Source Name Type
TO Good
Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Local GPS
Primary 4
Yes
Good
Yes
HSO
Backup
Yes
N/A
xxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxx Yes
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-41
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
Table 3-20: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
HSO information (underlined text above, verified from left to right) is usually the #1 reference source.
If this is not the case, have the OMCR determine the correct BTS timing source has been identified in
the database by entering the display bts csmgen command and correct as required using the edit
csm csmgen refsrc command.
* IMPORTANT
If any of the above areas fail, verify:
– If LED is RED, verify that HSO had been powered up for at least 5 minutes. After oscillator
temperature is stable, LED should go GREEN Wait for this to occur before continuing !
– If “timed out” is displayed in the Last Phase column, suspect the HSO output buffer or oscillator
is defective
– Verify the HSO is FULLY SEATED and LOCKED to prevent any possible card warpage
3-42
Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above):
– GPS information is usually the 0 reference source.
– At least one Primary source must indicate “Status = good” and “Valid = yes” to bring site up.
. . . continued on next page
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
Table 3-20: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to verify that the GPS receiver is in tracking mode.
gstatus
– Observe the following typical response:
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
(GPS)
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
GPS Receiver Control Task State: tracking satellites.
Time since last valid fix: 0 seconds.
Recent Change Data:
Antenna cable delay 0 ns.
Initial position: lat 117650000 msec, lon –350258000 msec, height 0 cm (GPS)
Initial position accuracy (0): estimated.
GPS Receiver Status:
Position hold: lat 118245548 msec, lon –350249750 msec, height 20270 cm
Current position: lat 118245548 msec, lon –350249750 msec, height 20270 cm
8 satellites tracked, receiving 8 satellites,
Current Dilution of Precision (PDOP or HDOP):
Date & Time: 1998:01:13:21:36:11
GPS Receiver Status Byte: 0x08
Chan:0, SVID: 16, Mode: 8, RSSI: 148, Status:
Chan:1, SVID: 29, Mode: 8, RSSI: 132, Status:
Chan:2, SVID: 18, Mode: 8, RSSI: 121, Status:
Chan:3, SVID: 14, Mode: 8, RSSI: 110, Status:
Chan:4, SVID: 25, Mode: 8, RSSI: 83, Status:
Chan:5, SVID: 3, Mode: 8, RSSI: 49, Status:
Chan:6, SVID: 19, Mode: 8, RSSI: 115, Status:
Chan:7, SVID: 22, Mode: 8, RSSI: 122, Status:
8 satellites visible.
0.
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
GPS Receiver Identification:
COPYRIGHT 1991–1996 MOTOROLA INC.
SFTW P/N # 98–P36830P
SOFTWARE VER # 8
SOFTWARE REV # 8
SOFTWARE DATE 6 AUG 1996
MODEL #
B3121P1115
HDWR P/N # _
SERIAL #
SSG0217769
MANUFACTUR DATE 6B07
OPTIONS LIST
IB
The receiver has 8 channels and is equipped with TRAIM.
Verify the following GPS information (shown above in underlined text):
– At least 4 satellites are tracked, and 4 satellites are visible.
– GPS Receiver Control Task State is “tracking satellites”. Do not continue until this occurs!
– Dilution of Precision indication is not more that 30.
Record the current position base site latitude, longitude, height and height reference (height reference
to Mean Sea Level (MSL) or GPS height (GPS). (GPS = 0 MSL = 1).
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-43
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
Table 3-20: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
If steps 1 through 6 pass, the GPS is good.
* IMPORTANT
If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify that:
– If Initial position accuracy is “estimated” (typical), at least 4 satellites must be tracked and
visible (1 satellite must be tracked and visible if actual lat, log, and height data for this site has
been entered into CDF file).
– If Initial position accuracy is “surveyed,” position data currently in the CDF file is assumed to be
accurate. GPS will not automatically survey and update its position.
– The GPS antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.
– GPS antenna connector center conductor measureS approximately +5 Vdc with respect to the
shield.
– There is no more than 4.5 dB of loss between the GPS antenna OSX connector and the BTS frame
GPS input.
– Any lightning protection installed between GPS antenna and BTS frame is installed correctly.
Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to verify that the CSM is warmed up and that GPS
acquisition has taken place.
debug dpllp
Observe the following typical response if the CSM is not warmed up (15 minutes from application of
power) (If warmed–up proceed to step 9)
CSM>DPLL Task Wait. 884 seconds left.
DPLL Task Wait. 882 seconds left.
DPLL Task Wait. 880 seconds left.
...........etc.
NOTE
The warm command can be issued at the MMI port used to force the CSM into warm–up, but the
reference oscillator will be unstable.
Observe the following typical response if the CSM is warmed up.
c:17486
c:17486
c:17470
c:17486
c:17470
c:17470
off:
off:
off:
off:
off:
off:
–11,
–11,
–11,
–11,
–11,
–11,
3,
3,
1,
3,
1,
1,
TK
TK
TK
TK
TK
TK
SRC:0
SRC:0
SRC:0
SRC:0
SRC:0
SRC:0
S0:
S0:
S0:
S0:
S0:
S0:
S1:–2013175,–2013175
S1:–2013175,–2013175
S1:–2013175,–2013175
S1:–2013175,–2013175
S1:–2013175,–2013175
S1:–2013175,–2013175
10
Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above, from left to right):
– Lower limit offset from tracked source variable is not less than –60 (equates to 3µs limit).
– Upper limit offset from tracked source variable is not more than +60 (equates to 3µs limit).
– TK SRC: 0 is selected, where SRC 0 = GPS.
11
Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to exit the debug mode display.
debug dpllp
3-44
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
LORAN–C
Initialization/Verification
Table 3-21: LORAN–C Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
At the CSM> prompt, enter lstatus  to verify that the LFR is in tracking
mode. A typical response is:
CSM> lstatus 
LFR Station
St ti
St
Status:
Clock coherence: 512
5930M 51/60 dB 0 S/N
5930X 52/64 dn –1 S/N
5990
47/55 dB –6 S/N
7980M 62/66 dB 10 S/N
7980W 65/69 dB 14 S/N
7980X 48/54 dB –4 S/N
7980Y 46/58 dB –8 S/N
7980Z 60/67 dB 8 S/N
8290M 50/65 dB 0 S/N
8290W 73/79 dB 20 S/N
8290W 58/61 dB 6 S/N
8970M 89/95 dB 29 S/N
8970W 62/66 dB 10 S/N
8970X 73/79 dB 22 S/N
8970Y 73/79 dB 19 S/N
8970Z 62/65 dB 10 S/N
9610M 62/65 dB 10 S/N
9610V 58/61 dB 8 S/N
9610W 47/49 dB –4 S/N
9610X 46/57 dB –5 S/N
9610Y 48/54 dB –5 S/N
9610Z 65/69 dB 12 S/N
9940M 50/53 dB –1 S/N
9940W 49/56 dB –4
4 S/N
9940Y 46/50 dB–10 S/N
9960M 73/79 dB 22 S/N
9960W 51/60 dB 0 S/N
9960X 51/63 dB –1 S/N
9960Y 59/67 dB 8 S/N
9960Z 89/96 dB 29 S/N
Note
> This must be greater
than 100 before LFR
becomes a valid source.
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Fl
Flag:
Flag: . PLL Station .
Flag:
Flag:E
Flag:
Flag
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Fl
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:E
Flag:E
Flag:E
Flag
Flag:
Flag:S
Flag:E
Flag:E
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Fl
Flag:
> This shows the LFR is
locked to the selected
PLL station.
LFR Task State: lfr locked to station 7980W
LFR Recent Change Data:
Search List: 5930 5990 7980 8290 8970 9940 9610 9960
PLL GRI: 7980W
LFR Master, reset not needed, not the reference source.
CSM>
This search list and PLL
data must match the
configuration for the
geographical location
of the cell site.
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-45
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
Table 3-21: LORAN–C Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
Note
Verify the following LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type):
– Locate the “dot” that indicates the current phase locked station assignment (assigned by MM).
– Verify that the station call letters are as specified in site documentation as well as M X Y Z
assignment.
– Verify the S/N ratio of the phase locked station is greater than 8.
At the CSM> prompt, enter sources  to display the current status of the the LORAN receiver.
– Observe the following typical response.
Num Source Name Type
TO Good
Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Local GPS
Primary 4
Yes
Good
–3
Yes
LFR ch A
Secondary 4
Yes
Good
–2013177
–2013177
Yes
Not used
Current reference source number: 1
*NOTE “Timed–out” should only be displayed while the LFR is warming up. “Not–Present” or
“Faulty” should not be displayed. If the LFR does not appear as one of the sources, then configure the
LFR as a back–up source by entering the following command at the CSM> prompt:
ss 1 2
LORAN LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type) is usually the #1 reference source
(verified from left to right).
* IMPORTANT
If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify:
– The LFR antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.
– The antenna pre–amplifier power and calibration twisted pair connections are intact and < 91.4 m
(300 ft) in length.
– A dependable connection to suitable Earth Ground is in place.
– The search list and PLL station for cellsite location are correctly configured .
NOTE
LFR functionality should be verified using the “source” command (as shown in Step 3). Use the
underlined responses on the LFR row to validate correct LFR operation.
3-46
Close the hyperterminal window.
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Test Equipment Setup
Connecting Test Equipment to
the BTS
All test equipment is controlled by the LMF through an IEEE–488/GPIB
bus. The LMF requires each piece of test equipment to have a factory set
GPIB address. If there is a communications problem between the LMF
and any piece of test equipment, verify that the GPIB addresses have
been set correctly as follows:
S Power meter address should be 13
S Communications test set should be 18
The following test equipment is required to perform optimization,
calibration and ATP tests:
S CDMA LMF
S Communications test set model supported by the CDMA LMF
S Power meter model supported by the CDMA LMF (required when
using the HP 8921A/600 and Advantest R3465 test sets)
S Non–radiating transmit line termination load
S Directional coupler and in–line attenuator
S RF cables and adapters
Refer to Table 3-22 for an overview of connections for test equipment
currently supported by the CDMA LMF. In addition, see the following
figures:
S Figure 3-15 and Figure 3-16 show the test set connections for TX
calibration
S Figure 3-17 and Figure 3-18 show the test set connections for
optimization/ATP tests
Supported Test Equipment
Optimization and ATP testing may be performed using the following test
equipment:
CyberTest
Advantest R3465 and HP–437B or Gigatronics Power Meter
Hewlett–Packard HP 8935
Hewlett–Packard HP 8921 (W/CDMA and PCS Interface (1.9 GHz))
and HP–437B or Gigatronics Power Meter
S Spectrum Analyzer (HP8594E) – optional
S Rubidium Standard Timebase – optional
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the test equipment, all transmit (TX)
test connections must be through a 30 dB directional
coupler plus a 20 dB in-line attenuator for both the 800
MHz and 1.9 GHz BTSs.
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY 3-47
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Test Equipment Set–up
– continued
Test Equipment Preparation
For specific steps to prepare each type of test set and power meter to
perform calibration and ATP, see Appendix F.
Test Equipment Connection
Chart
Table 3-22 depicts the current test equipment available meeting Motorola
standards.
To identify the connection ports, locate the test equipment presently
being used in the TEST SETS columns, and read down the column.
Where a ball appears in the column, connect one end of the test cable to
that port. Follow the horizontal line to locate the end connection(s),
reading up the column to identify the appropriate equipment/BTS port.
Table 3-22: Test Equipment Setup
TEST SETS
SIGNAL
EVEN SECOND
SYNCHRONIZATION
19.6608 MHZ
CLOCK
CONTROL
IEEE 488 BUS
3-48
Cyber–
Test
Advantest
EVEN
EVEN SEC
SEC REF SYNC IN
TIME
BASE IN
CDMA
TIME BASE
IN
ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENT
HP
8935
HP
8921A
HP
8921
W/PCS
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
EXT
REF IN
Power
Meter
GPIB
Interface
LMF
Directional
Coupler & Pad*
SYNC
MONITOR
CDMA
CDMA
TIME BASE TIME BASE
IN
IN
IEEE
488
GPIB
HP–IB
HP–IB
HP–IB
TX TEST
CABLES
RF
IN/OUT
INPUT
50–OHM
RF
IN/OUT
RF
IN/OUT
RF
IN/OUT
RX TEST
CABLES
RF IN/
OUT
RF OUT
50–OHM
DUPLEX
DUPLEX
OUT
RF OUT
ONLY
BTS
FREQ
MONITOR
HP–IB
GPIB
SERIAL
PORT
20 DB
PAD
BTS
PORT
TX1–6
RX1–12
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Test Equipment Set–up – continued
Equipment Warm-up
IMPORTANT
Warm-up BTS equipment for a minimum of 60 minutes
prior to performing the BTS optimization procedure. This
assures BTS site stability and contributes to optimization
accuracy. (Time spent running initial power-up,
hardware/firmware audit, and BTS download counts as
warm-up time.)
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any BTS
TX OUT connector, verify there are no CDMA BBX
channels keyed. At active sites, have the OMC-R/CBSC
place the antenna (sector) assigned to the LPA under test
OOS. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury
and/or equipment damage.
Automatic Cable Calibration
Set–up
Figure 3-14 shows the cable calibration setup for various supported test
sets. The left side of the diagram depicts the location of the input and
output ports of each test set, and the right side details the set up for each
test. Table 3-26 provides a procedure for calibrating cables.
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY 3-49
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Test Equipment Set–up
– continued
Figure 3-14: Cable Calibration Test Setup
SUPPORTED TEST SETS
CALIBRATION SET UP
Motorola CyberTest
A. SHORT CABLE CAL
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÌ
ANT IN
SHORT
CABLE
TEST
SET
RF GEN OUT
Note: The Directional Coupler is not used with the
Cybertest Test Set. The TX cable is connected
directly to the Cybertest Test Set.
B. RX TEST SETUP
A 10dB attenuator must be used with the short test
cable for cable calibration with the CyberTest Test
Set. The 10dB attenuator is used only for the cable
calibration procedure, not with the test cables for
TX calibration and ATP tests.
N–N FEMALE
ADAPTER
RX
CABLE
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ANT
IN
SHORT
CABLE
TEST
SET
DUPLEX
OUT
Advantest Model R3465
RF OUT
50–OHM
C. TX TEST SETUP
50 Ω
ΤERM.
INPUT
50–OHM
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
20 DB IN–LINE
ATTENUATOR
FOR 1.9 GHZ
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8921A
SHORT
CABLE
TX
CABLE
N–N FEMALE
ADAPTER
TEST
SET
TX
CABLE
Note: For 800 MHZ only. The HP8921A cannot
be used to calibrate cables for PCS frequencies.
FW00089
3-50
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Test Equipment Set–up – continued
Manual Cable Calibration
If manual cable calibration is required, refer to the procedures in
Appendix F.
Set–up for TX Calibration
Figure 3-15 and Figure 3-16 show the test set connections for TX
calibration.
Figure 3-15: TX Calibration Test Setup (CyberTest and HP 8935)
TEST SETS
TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP
Motorola CyberTest
POWER
SENSOR
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÌ
Ì
FRONT PANEL
POWER
METER
(OPTIONAL)*
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
OUT
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
50 Ω
ΤERM.
RF
IN/OUT
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
TEST SET
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
CONTROL
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
NOTE: THE DIRECTIONAL COUPLER IS NOT USED WITH THE
CYBERTEST TEST SET. THE TX CABLE IS CONNECTED DIRECTLY
TO THE CYBERTEST TEST SET.
TX
TEST
CABLE
IN
TX TEST
2O DB
CABLE
IN–LINE
ATTENUATOR
* A POWER METER CAN BE USED IN PLACE
OF THE COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET FOR TX
CALIBRATION/AUDIT
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
HP–IB
TO GPIB
BOX
GPIB
CABLE
ÁÁ
Á
ÁÁ
Á
** BLACK PORTION OF THE
DIAGRAM REPRESENTS THE
RAISED PART OF THE
SWITCH
DIP SWITCH
SETTINGS**
TX ANTENNA
PORT OR TX
RFDS
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLERS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
RF IN/OUT
ON
BTS
GPIB ADRS
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
LAN
LAN
G MODE
RS232
NULL
MODEM
CABLE
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
CDMA
LMF
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
FW00094
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY 3-51
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Test Equipment Set–up
– continued
Figure 3-16: TX Calibration Test Setup HP 8921A and Advantest
TEST SETS
TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP
NOTE: THE HP8921A AND ADVANTEST
CANNOT BE USED FOR TX CALIBRATION. A
POWER METER MUST BE USED.
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
POWER
SENSOR
POWER METER
DIRECTIONAL COUPLER
(30 DB)
50 Ω
ΤERM.
TX
TEST
CABLE
2O DB
IN–LINE
ATTENUATOR
TX
TEST
CABLE
GPIB
CABLE
TX ANTENNA GROUP
OR TX RFDS DIRECTIONAL
COUPLERS
* BLACK PORTION OF THE
DIAGRAM REPRESENTS THE
RAISED PART OF THE
SWITCH
DIP SWITCH
S MODE
SETTINGS*
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
BTS
ON
GPIB ADRS
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
LAN
LAN
RS232
NULL
MODEM
CABLE
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
CDMA
LMF
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
FW00095
3-52
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Test Equipment Set–up – continued
Setup for Optimization/ATP
Figure 3-17 and Figure 3-18 show the test set connections for
optimization/ATP tests.
Figure 3-17: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Calibration (CyberTest, HP 8935 and Advantest)
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
Motorola CyberTest
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE
DUPLEXED, BOTH THE TX AND RX TEST
CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED
ANTENNA GROUP AND USE THE 30 DB
DIRECTIONAL COUPLER AND 20 DB IN–LINE
ATTENUATOR.
CDMA
TIMEBASE
TEST SET
IN
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
RX
TEST
CABLE
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
RF
OUT
NOTE: The Directional Coupler is not used
with the Cybertest Test Set. The TX cable is
connected directly to the Cybertest Test set.
50 Ω
ΤERM.
2O DB
IN–LINE
ATTENUATOR
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
GPIB
CABLE
TX
TEST
CABLE
HP–IB
TO GPIB
BOX
ÁÁ
Á
ÁÁ
Á
RX ANTENNA
PORT OR RFDS
RX ANTENNA
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
TX ANTENNA
PORT OR RFDS
RX ANTENNA
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
* BLACK PORTION OF THE
DIAGRAM REPRESENTS THE
RAISED PART OF THE
SWITCH
DIPSWITCH SETTINGS*
BTS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
RF IN/OUT
FREQ
MONITOR
Advantest Model R3465
SYNC MONITOR EVEN
SEC TICK PULSE
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
EVEN
SECOND/SYNC
IN (BNC “T”
WITH 50 OHM
TERMINATOR)
IN
RF
IN/OUT
DUPLEX OUT
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
OUT
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÌ
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
ON
SYNC
MONITOR
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
GPIB ADRS
CSM
BNC
“T”
LAN
RF OUT
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
LAN
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
CDMA
LMF
GPIB CONNECTS
TO BACK OF UNIT
INPUT
50–OHM
TO EXT TRIGGER CONNECTOR
ON REAR OF TEST SET
(FOR DETAILS, SEE FIGURE F-3)
08/01/2001
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
FW00096
PRELIMINARY 3-53
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Test Equipment Set–up
– continued
Figure 3-18: Optimization/ATP Test Setup HP 8921A
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8921A W/PCS Interface
(for 1700 and 1900 MHz)
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE
DUPLEXED, BOTH THE TX AND RX TEST
CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED
ANTENNA GROUP AND USE THE 30 DB
DIRECTIONAL COUPLER AND 20 DB IN–LINE
ATTENUATOR.
OUT
CDMA
TIMEBASE
TEST SET
IN
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
RX
TEST
CABLE
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
GPIB
CONNECTS
TO BACK OF
UNITS
EVEN
SECOND/SYNC
IN (BNC “T”
WITH 50 OHM
TERMINATOR)
IN
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
HP PCS
INTERFACE*
50 Ω
ΤERM.
RF
IN/OUT
* FOR 1700 AND
1900 MHZ ONLY
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
RF OUT
ONLY
2O DB
IN–LINE
ATTENUATOR
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8921A
(for 800 MHz)
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
GPIB
CONNECTS
TO BACK OF
UNIT
RX ANTENNA
PORT OR RFDS
RX ANTENNA
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
TX ANTENNA
PORT OR RFDS
RX ANTENNA
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
FREQ
MONITOR
RF OUT
ONLY
SYNC
MONITOR
LAN
* BLACK PORTION OF THE
DIAGRAM REPRESENTS THE
RAISED PART OF THE
SWITCH
DIPSWITCH SETTINGS*
BTS
RF
IN/OUT
GPIB
CABLE
TX
TEST
CABLE
GPIB ADRS
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
CSM
LAN
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
CDMA
LMF
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
REF FW00097
3-54
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Test Set Calibration
Background
Proper test equipment set–up ensures that all measurements are correct
and the test equipment and associated test cables do not introduce
measurement errors.
NOTE
If the test equipment set (see Chapter 1, Terms and
Abbreviations) being used to interface with the BTS has
been calibrated and maintained as a set, this procedure does
not need to be performed.
This procedure must be performed before the optimization. Verify all test
equipment (including all associated test cables and adapters actually used
to interface all test equipment and the BTS) has been calibrated and
maintained as a set.
CAUTION
If any piece of test equipment, test cable, or RF adapter,
that makes up the calibrated test equipment set has been
replaced, the set must be re-calibrated. Failure to do so can
introduce measurement errors, resulting in incorrect
measurements and degradation to system performance.
Motorola recommends repeating cable calibration before
testing at each BTS site.
IMPORTANT
Calibration of the communications test set (or equivalent
test equipment) must be performed at the site before
calibrating the overall test set. Calibrate the test equipment
after it has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a
minimum of 60 minutes.
Purpose
These procedures access the CDMA LMF automated calibration routine
used to determine the path losses of the supported communications
analyzer, power meter, associated test cables, and (if used) antenna
switch that make up the overall calibrated test equipment set. After
calibration, the gain/loss offset values are stored in a test measurement
offset file on the CDMA LMF.
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY 3-55
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Test Set Calibration – continued
Manual cable calibration procedures using the HP8921A and Advantest
R3465 communications test sets are provided in Appendix F, if needed.
Manual power meter calibration procedures are also included in
Appendix F.
Selecting Test Equipment
Prerequisites
A Serial Connection and a Network Connection tab are provided for
test equipment selection. The Serial Connection tab is used when the
test equipment items are connected directly to the CDMA LMF
computer via a GPIB box (normal setup). The Network Connection tab
is used when the test equipment is to be connected remotely via a
network connection.
Ensure the following has been completed before selecting test
equipment:
S Test equipment is correctly connected and turned on.
S Test equipment GPIB addresses have been verified as correct.
S CDMA LMF computer serial port and test equipment are connected to
the GPIB box.
Selecting Test Equipment
Use Options > LMF Options in the menu bar to select test equipment
automatically (using the autodetect feature) or manually.
Manually Selecting Test
Equipment in a Serial
Connection Tab
Test equipment can be manually specified before, or after, the test
equipment is connected. CDMA LMF does not check to see if the test
equipment is actually detected for manual specification.
Table 3-23: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection Tab
Step
Action
In the menu bar, click Options and select LMF Options... from the pulldown. The LMF Options
window appears.
Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront).
Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).
Click on the Manual Specification button (if not enabled).
Click on the check box corresponding to the test item(s) to be used.
Type the GPIB address in the corresponding GPIB address box. Addresses are:
13=Power Meter
18=CDMA Analyzer
. . . continued on next page
3-56
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Test Set Calibration – continued
Table 3-23: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection Tab
Step
Action
Click on Apply. (The button will darken until the selection has been recorded.)
NOTE
With manual selection, CDMA LMF does not detect the test equipment to see if it is connected and
communicating with CDMA LMF.
Click on Dismiss to close the test equipment window.
Automatically Selecting Test
Equipment in a Serial
Connection Tab
When using the auto-detection feature to select test equipment, the
CDMA LMF examines which test equipment items are actually
communicating with CDMA LMF. Follow the procedure in Table 3-24
to use the auto-detect feature.
Table 3-24: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-Detect
Step
Action
In the menu bar, click Options and select LMF Options... from the pulldown. The LMF Options
window appears.
Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront).
Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).
Click on Auto–Detection (if not enabled).
Type in the GPIB addresses in the box labeled GPIB address to search (if not already displayed).
* IMPORTANT
When both a power meter and analyzer are selected, the first item listed in the GPIB addresses to
search box will be used for RF power measurements (i.e., TX calibration). The address for a power
meter is normally 13 and the address for a CDMA analyzer is normally 18. If 13,18 is included in the
GPIB addresses to search box, the power meter (13) will be used for RF power measurements. If the
test equipment items are manually selected the CDMA analyzer is used only if a power meter is not
selected.
Click Apply. The button will darken until the selection has been committed. A check mark will appear
in the Manual Configuration section for detected test equipment items.
Click Dismiss to close the LMF Options window.
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY 3-57
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Test Set Calibration – continued
Calibrating Test Equipment
The calibrate test equipment function zeros the power measurement level
of the test equipment item that is to be used for TX calibration and audit.
If both a power meter and an analyzer are connected (for example, an HP
437 and an HP8921A/600), only the power meter is zeroed.
Calibrate Test Equipment from the Util menu list is used to calibrate
test equipment item before being used for testing. The test equipment
must be selected before beginning calibration. Follow the procedure in
Table 3-25 to calibrate the test equipment.
Table 3-25: Test Equipment Calibration
Step
Action
From the Util menu, select Calibrate Test Equipment. A Directions window is displayed. Follow
the instructions provided.
Follow the direction provided.
Click on Continue to close the Directions window. A status window is displayed.
Click on OK to close the status report window.
Calibrating Cables – Overview
The cable calibration function is used to measure the loss (in dB) for the
TX and RX cables that are to be used for testing. A CDMA analyzer is
used to measure the loss of each cable configuration (TX cable
configuration and RX cable configuration). The cable calibration
consists of the following steps.
S Measure the loss of a short cable. This is done to compensate for any
measurement error of the analyzer. The short cable, which is used only
for the calibration process, is used in series with both the TX and RX
cable configuration when they are measured. The measured loss of the
short cable is deducted from the measured loss of the TX and RX
cable configuration to determine the actual loss of the TX and RX
cable configurations. This deduction is done so any error in the
analyzer measurement will be adjusted out of both the TX and RX
measurements.
S The short cable plus the RX cable configuration loss is measured. The
RX cable configuration normally consists only of a coax cable with
type–N connectors that is long enough to reach from the BTS RX port
the test equipment. For BTSs with antenna ports carrying duplexed TX
and RX, a directional coupler and, if required by BTS type, an
additional attenuator are also used on the RX cable configuration and
must be included in the measurement.
S The short cable plus the TX cable configuration loss is measured. The
TX cable configuration normally consists of two coax cables with
type–N connectors and a directional coupler, a load, and an additional
attenuator if required by the BTS type. The total loss of the path loss
3-58
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Test Set Calibration – continued
of the TX cable configuration must be as required for the BTS
(normally 30 or 50 dB). The Motorola Cybertest analyzer is different
in that the required attenuation/load is built into the test set so the TX
cable configuration consists only of the required length coax cable.
Calibrating Cables with a
CDMA Analyzer
The Cable Calibration menu item from the Util menu list is used to
calibrate both TX and RX test cables for use with CDMA LMF.
NOTE
LMF cable calibration cannot be accomplished with an
HP8921A analyzer for 1.9 MHz. A different analyzer type
or the signal generator and spectrum analyzer method must
be used (refer to Table 3-27 and Table 3-28). Cable
calibration values must be manually entered if the signal
generator and spectrum analyzer method is used. For the
HP8921A, refer to Appendix F.
The test equipment must be selected before this procedure can be started.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-26 to calibrate the cables. Figure 3-14
illustrates the cable calibration test equipment setup.
Table 3-26: Cable Calibration
Step
Action
From the Util menu, select Cable Calibration. A Cable Calibration window is displayed.
Enter a channel number(s) in the Channels box. Multiple channels numbers must be separated with a
comma, no space (i.e., 200,800). When two or more channels numbers are entered, the cables will be
calibrated for each channel. Interpolation will be accomplished for other channels as required for TX
calibration.
Select TX and RX CABLE CAL, TX CABLE CAL or RX CABLE CAL in the Cable Calibration
picklist.
Click OK. Follow the directions displayed for each step. A status report window will be displayed
with the results of the cable calibration.
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY 3-59
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Test Set Calibration – continued
Calibrating TX Cables Using a
Signal Generator and Spectrum
Analyzer
Follow the procedure in Table 3-27 to calibrate the TX cables using the
signal generator and spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-19 for a
diagram of the signal generator and spectrum analyzer.
Table 3-27: Calibrating TX Cables Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer
Step
Action
Connect a short test cable between the spectrum analyzer and the signal generator.
Set signal generator to 0 dBm at the customer frequency of the 869.7–893.31 MHz band for North
American cellular and 1930–1990 MHz band for North American PCS.
Use spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-19, “A”) and record the value.
Connect the spectrum analyzer’s short cable to point “B”, as shown in the lower portion of the
diagram, to measure cable output at customer frequency (869.7–893.31 MHz band for North American
cellular and 1930–1990 MHz for North American PCS) and record the value at point “B”.
Calibration factor = A – B Example:
Cal = –1 dBm – (–53.5 dBm) = 52.5 dB
NOTE
The short cable is used for calibration only. It is not part of the final test setup. After calibration is
completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup, as is, to ensure test procedures use
the correct calibration factor.
Figure 3-19: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for TX Cable Calibration
(Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer)
Signal
Generator
Spectrum
Analyzer
40W NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
SHORT
TEST
CABLE
THIS WILL BE THE CONNECTION
TO THE TX PORTS DURING TX
CALIBRATION AND TO THE TX/RX
PORTS DURING ATP TESTS.
50 OHM
TERMINATION
Spectrum
Analyzer
ONE 20DB 20 W IN
LINE ATTENUATOR
(1.9 GHZ ONLY)
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
SHORT TEST CABLE
THIS WILL BE THE CONNECTION TO THE
POWER METER DURING TX CALIBRATION
AND TO THE CDMA ANALYZER DURING TX
ATP TESTS.
3-60
Signal
Generator
SECOND RF
TEST CABLE.
FW00293
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Test Set Calibration – continued
Calibrating RX Cables Using a
Signal Generator and Spectrum
Analyzer
Follow the procedure in Table 3-28 to calibrate the RX cables using the
signal generator and spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-20, if required.
Table 3-28: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer
Step
Action
Connect a short test cable to the spectrum analyzer and connect the other end to the Signal Generator.
Set signal generator to –10 dBm at the customer’s RX frequency of 824.7–848.31 MHz for North
American cellular or 1850–1910 MHz band for North American PCS.
Use spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-20, “A”) and record the value
for “A”.
Connect the test setup, as shown in the lower portion of the diagram, to measure the output at the
customer’s RX frequency (824.7–848.31 MHz for North American cellular or 1850–1910 MHz band
for North American PCS). Record the value at point ‘‘B”.
* IMPORTANT
When preparing to calibrate a BTS with duplexed TX and RX the cable calibration setup must include
the 30 dB directional coupler and 20 dB in–line attenuator as in the TX cable calibration shown in
Figure 3-19.
Calibration factor = A – B
Example:
Cal = –12 dBm – (–14 dBm) = 2 dB
NOTE
The short test cable is used for test equipment setup calibration only. It is not part of the final test
setup. After calibration is completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup, as is, to
ensure test procedures use the correct calibration factor.
Figure 3-20: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for RX ATP Test
(Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer)
Signal
Generator
Signal
Generator
Spectrum
Analyzer
CONNECTION TO THE OUTPUT
PORT DURING RX MEASUREMENTS
SHORT
TEST
CABLE
Spectrum
Analyzer
IMPORTANT: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE
DUPLEXED, THE RX TEST CABLE CONNECTS
TO THE DUPLEXED ANTENNA GROUP AND
MUST USE/BE CALIBRATED WITH THE 30 DB
DIRECTIONAL COUPLER AND 20 DB IN–LINE
ATTENUATOR. SEE FIGURE 3-19.
08/01/2001
CONNECTION TO THE RX PORTS
DURING RX MEASUREMENTS.
SHORT TEST
CABLE
BULLET
CONNECTOR
LONG
CABLE 2
PRELIMINARY 3-61
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Test Set Calibration – continued
Setting Cable Loss Values
Cable loss values for the TX and RX test cable configurations are
normally set by accomplishing automatic cable calibration with use of
the applicable test equipment. The resulting values are stored in the cable
loss files. The cable loss values can also be set/changed manually.
CAUTION
Cable loss values must be manually entered in the LMF
database if manual cable calibration was performed.
Failure to do this will result in inaccurate BTS calibration
and reduced site performance.
Prerequisites
S Logged into the BTS
Table 3-29: Setting Cable Loss Values
Step
Action
Click on the Util menu.
Select Edit > Cable Loss > TX or RX. A data entry pop–up window will appear.
Click on the Add Row button to add a new channel number. Then click in the Channel # and Loss
(dBm) columns and enter the desired values.
To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.
To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.
Click on the Save button to save displayed values.
Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window. Values that were entered/changed after the Save
button was used will not be saved.
NOTE
S If cable loss values exist for two different channels the LMF will interpolate for all other channels.
S Entered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and
login.
3-62
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Test Set Calibration – continued
Setting TX Coupler Loss Value
If an in–service TX coupler is installed the coupler loss (e.g., 30 dB)
must be manually entered so it will be included in the LMF TX
calibration and audit calculations.
Prerequisites
S Logged into the BTS
Table 3-30: Setting TX Coupler Loss Values
Step
Action
Click on the Util menu.
Select Edit > TX Coupler Loss. A data entry pop–up window will appear.
Click in the Loss (dBm) column for each carrier that has a coupler and enter the appropriate value.
To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.
Click on the Save button to save displayed values.
Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window. Values that were entered/changed after the Save
button was used will not be saved.
NOTE
S The In–Service Calibration check box in the Options > LMF Options > BTS Options tab must
checked before entered TX coupler loss values will be used by the TX calibration and audit
functions.
S Entered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and
login.
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY 3-63
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Bay Level Offset Calibration
Introduction
Calibration compensates for normal equipment variations within the
BTS and assures maximum measurement accuracy.
RF Path Bay Level Offset
Calibration
Bay Level Offset (BLO) calibration identifies the accumulated gain in
every transmit path (BBX2 slot) at the BTS site and stores that value in
the CDMA LMF CAL file. The BLOs are subsequently downloaded to
each BBX2.
Each transmit path starts at an SCCP shelf backplane BBX2 slot, travels
through the CIO card, trunking module, LPA, trunking module (again),
TX filter or TX filter combiner, DRDC or TRDC, and ends at a BTS TX
antenna port.
Each receive path starts at a BTS RX antenna port, travels through a
DRDC or TRDC, the MPC card, the CIO card, and terminates at a
backplane BBX2 slot.
Calibration identifies the accumulated gain in every transmit path ( by
BBX2 slot) at the BTS site and stores that value in the CAL file. When
the TX path calibration is performed, the RX path BLO will
automatically be set to the default value.
When to Calibrate BLOs
Calibration of BLOs is required after initial BTS installation.
The BLO data of an operational BTS site must be re-calibrated once
each year. Motorola recommends re-calibrating the BLO data for all
associated RF paths after replacing any of the following components or
associated interconnecting RF cabling:
3-64
BBX2 board
SCCP shelf
CIO card
CIO–to–LPA trunking module RF cable
LPA trunking module
LPA
Trunking module–to–TX filter/filter combiner RF cable
TX filter or TX filter combiner
TX filter/filter combiner–to–DRDC/TRDC cable
DRDC or TRDC
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
TX Path Calibration
The TX Path Calibration assures correct site installation, cabling, and the
first order functionality of all installed equipment. The proper function
of each RF path is verified during calibration. The external test
equipment is used to validate/calibrate the TX paths of the BTS.
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX
OUT connector you must first verify that there are no
CDMA channels keyed. Have the OMC–R place the sector
assigned to the LPA under test OOS. Failure to do so can
result in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.
CAUTION
Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap
while handling any circuit card/module. If this is not done,
there is a high probability that the card/module could be
damaged by ESD.
IMPORTANT
At new site installations, to facilitate the complete test of
each SCCP shelf (if the shelf is not already fully populated
with BBX2 boards), move BBX2 boards from shelves
currently not under test and install them into the empty
BBX2 slots of the shelf currently being tested to insure that
all BBX2 TX paths are tested.
– This procedure can be bypassed on operational sites
that are due for periodic optimization.
– Prior to testing, view the CDF file to verify the
correct BBX2 slots are equipped. Edit the file as
required to include BBX2 slots not currently
equipped (per Systems Engineering documentation).
RX Path Calibration
RX path calibration is not required or supported on CDMA BTS
systems. Default RX calibration values are written to the RX calibration
data files during the TX calibration routine. Functionality is verified
during Frame Erasure Rate (FER) testing.
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY 3-65
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
BLO Calibration Data File
During the calibration process, the CDMA LMF creates a calibration
(CAL) data file where BLO values are stored. After calibration has been
completed, this offset data must be downloaded to the BBX2s using the
CDMA LMF Download BLO function. An explanation of the file is
shown below.
NOTE
Due to the size of the file, Motorola recommends printing
out a copy of a bts.cal file and referring to it for the
following descriptions.
The CAL file is subdivided into sections organized on a per–slot basis (a
slot Block).
The Slot 1 Block contains the calibration data for the six BBX2 slots.
The Slot 20 Block contains the calibration data for the redundant BBX2
(see Table 3-32). Each BBX2 slot Block header contains:
S A creation Date and Time – broken down into separate parameters of
createMonth, createDay, createYear, createHour, and createMin.
S The number of calibration entries – fixed at 720 entries corresponding
to 360 calibration points of the CAL file – plus the slot Block format.
Within the slot Block body, the BBX2 calibration data (BayLevelCal) is
organized as a large flat array. The array is organized by branch, BBX2
SCCP cage slot, and calibration point.
S The first breakdown of the array indicates which branch the contained
calibration points are for. The array covers transmit, main receive, and
diversity receive offsets as follows:
Table 3-31: BLO BTS.cal file Array Branch Assignments
3-66
Range
Branch Assignment
C[1]–C[120]
Transmit
C[121]–C[240]
No SC4812ET Lite BLO cal
point entries (default only)
C[241]–C[360]
Receive
C[361]–C[480]
No SC4812ET Lite BLO cal
point entries (default only)
C[481]–C[600]
Diversity Receive
C[601]–C[720]
No SC4812ET Lite BLO cal
point entries (default only)
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
S The second breakdown of the array is by BBX by sector. Three sectors
are allowed.
Table 3-32: SC4812ET Lite BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector)
BBX2
Sectorization
TX Branch
RX Branch
RX Diversity
Branch
Slot[1] (Primary BBX2s 1 through 6)
1 (Omni)
3–Sector,
1st Carrier
3–Sector,
2nd Carrier
Not Used in SC4812ET Lite
(CAL file entries are
Channel 0 with default
power set level.)
C[1]–C[20]
C[241]–C[260]
C[481]–C[500]
C[21]–C[40]
C[261]–C[280]
C[501]–C[520]
C[41]–C[60]
C[281]–C[300]
C[521]–C[540]
C[61]–C[80]
C[301]–C[320]
C[541]–C[560]
C[81]–C[100]
C[321]–C[340]
C[561]–C[580]
C[101]–C[120]
C[341]–C[360]
C[581]–C[600]
C[121]–C[140]
C[361]–C[380]
C[601]–C[620]
C[141]–C[160]
C[381]–C[400]
C[621]–C[640]
C[161]–C[180]
C[401]–C[420]
C[641]–C[660]
C[181]–C[200]
C[421]–C[440]
C[661]–C[680]
C[201]–C[220]
C[441]–C[460]
C[681]–C[700]
C[221]–C[240]
C[461]–C[480]
C[701]–C[720]
Slot[20] (Redundant BBX2–R1)
1 (Omni)
3–Sector,
1st Carrier
3–Sector,
2nd Carrier
Not Used in SC4812ET Lite
(CAL file entries are
Channel 0 with default
power set level.)
C[1]–C[20]
C[241]–C[260]
C[481]–C[500]
C[21]–C[40]
C[261]–C[280]
C[501]–C[520]
C[41]–C[60]
C[281]–C[300]
C[521]–C[540]
C[61]–C[80]
C[301]–C[320]
C[541]–C[560]
C[81]–C[100]
C[321]–C[340]
C[561]–C[580]
C[101]–C[120]
C[341]–C[360]
C[581]–C[600]
C[121]–C[140]
C[361]–C[380]
C[601]–C[620]
C[141]–C[160]
C[381]–C[400]
C[621]–C[640]
C[161]–C[180]
C[401]–C[420]
C[641]–C[660]
C[181]–C[200]
C[421]–C[440]
C[661]–C[680]
C[201]–C[220]
C[441]–C[460]
C[681]–C[700]
C[221]–C[240]
C[461]–C[480]
C[701]–C[720]
S Refer to the CAL file print–out and Table 3-32. It can be seen that
there is one BBX2 slot per sector, and 10 calibration points for each
BBX2 (sector) are supported for each branch. Each “calibration point”
consists of two entries.
S The first entry for a calibration point (all odd entries) identifies the
CDMA channel (frequency) where the BLO is measured. The second
calibration point entry (all even entries) is the power set level
(PwrLvlAdj). The valid range for PwrLvlAdj is from 2500 to 27500
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY 3-67
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
(2500 corresponds to –125 dBm and 27500 corresponds to +125
dBm).
S The 10 calibration points for each slot/branch combination must be
stored in order of increasing frequency. If less than 10 points
(frequencies) are calibrated, the BLO data for the highest frequency
calibrated is written into the remainder of the 10 points for that
slot/branch.
Example:
C[1]=384
(odd cal entry)
C[2]=19102
= 1 “calibration point”
(even cal entry)
C[3]=777
(odd cal entry)
C[4]=19086
(even cal entry)
C[19]=777
(odd cal entry)
C[20]=19086
(even cal entry)
In the example above, BLO was measured at only two frequencies
(channels 384 and 777) for SCCP slot BBX–1 transmit (Table 3-32).
The BLO data for the highest frequency measured (777) will be
written to the remaining eight transmit calibration points (defined by
entries C[5] through C[20]) for BBX2–1.
S When BLO data is downloaded to the BBXs, the data is downloaded
to the devices in the order it is stored in the CAL file. TxCal data
(C[1] – C[60]) is sent first. BBX2 slot 1’s 10 calibration points (C[1]
– C[20]) are sent initially, followed by BBX2 slot 2’s 10 calibration
points (C[21] – C[40]), and so on. The RxCal data is sent next,
followed by the RxDCal data.
S Temperature compensation data (TempLevelCal) is also stored in the
CAL file for each slot Block.
Test Equipment Setup:
RF Path Calibration
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-33 and refer as needed to
Figure 3-15 or Figure 3-16 to set up test equipment.
Table 3-33: Set Up Test Equipment (RF Path Calibration)
Step
3-68
Action
If it has not already been done, refer to the procedure in Table 3-6 to interface the CDMA LMF
computer terminal to the frame LAN A connector.
If it has not already been done, refer to Table 3-7 to start a GUI LMF session.
If required, calibrate the test equipment per the procedure in Table 3-25.
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
Table 3-33: Set Up Test Equipment (RF Path Calibration)
Step
Action
! CAUTION
To prevent damage to the test equipment, all transmit (TX) test connections must be via the 30 dB
directional coupler for 800 MHz or via a 30 dB coupler with a 20 dB in–line attenuator for 1900
MHz.
For TX path calibration, verify that the coaxial cable from the appropriate ANTENNA connector
(Figure 1-6 or Figure 1-7) is connected to the test equipment RF input port via the directional
coupler.
Transmit (TX) Path Calibration
The assigned channel frequency and desired power level at the frame TX
ports for transmit calibration are derived from the BTS CDF file. Each
BBX2 at the site is assigned to a sector and carrier. These are specified
respectively in the sector and carrier fields of the ParentCARRIER
parameter in each BBX2’s CDF file block. The channel frequency and
desired power for the assigned sector are specified respectively in the
ChannelList and SIFPilotPwr parameters of the CDF block for the
CARRIER to which the BBX2 is assigned.
The calibration procedure attempts to adjust the measured power to
within +0.5 dB of the desired power. The calibration will pass if the
error is less than +1.5 dB.
The TX BLO for the SC4812ET Lite is approximately 42.0 dB ±5.0 dB.
BLO is the gain in dB between the known power output of the BBX2
and the measured power at the TX port. BLO is derived by deducting the
known BBX2 power output from the power measured at the TX port or
(Measured Power) – (BBX2 TX Power Output).
Example:
Measured Power (at TX port) = 36.0 dBm
Known BBX TX Power Output = –6.0 dBm
BLO = (36.0) – (–6.0) = 42.0 dB gain
The CDMA LMF Tests menu list items TX Calibration and All
Cal/Audit perform TX BLO Calibration testing for installed BBX(s).
The All Cal/Audit menu item initiates a series of actions to perform TX
calibration, download BLO, and perform TX audit if the TX calibration
passes. The TX Calibration selection performs only the TX calibration.
When the TX Calibration selection is used, BLO download and TX
audit must be performed as separate activities. All measurements are
made through the appropriate antenna connector using the calibrated TX
cable setup.
In both the TX Calibration and All Cal/Audit dialog boxes, a Verify
BLO checkbox is provided and checked by default. After the actual TX
calibration is completed during either the TX Calibration or All
Cal/Audit process, the BLO derived from the calibration is compared to
a standard, acceptable BLO tolerance for the BTS. In some installations,
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY 3-69
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
additional items may be installed in the transmit path. The additional
change in gain from these items could cause BLO verification failure
and, therefore, failure of the entire calibration. In these cases, either the
Verify BLO checkbox should be unchecked or the additional path losses
should be added into each applicable sector using the Util > Edit > TX
Coupler Loss... function.
Prerequisites
Before running this test, ensure that the following have been done:
S CSM–1, GLIs, MCCs, and BBX2s have correct code load and data
load.
S Primary CSM and MGLI are INS.
S All BBX2s are OOS_RAM.
S Test equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX
BLO calibration.
S LMF is logged into the BTS in the GUI environment.
Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-15 and Figure 3-16
and follow the procedure in Table 3-34 to perform the TX calibration
test.
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX
OUT connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX2
channels keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury and/or equipment damage.
IMPORTANT
3-70
Verify all BBX2 boards removed and repositioned have
been returned to their assigned shelves/slots. Any BBX2
boards moved since they were downloaded will have to be
downloaded again.
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
Table 3-34: All Cal/Audit Path Calibration
Step
Action
Configure test equipment for TX path calibration per Table 3-33.
Select the BBX2(s) to be calibrated.
From the Tests menu, select All Cal/Audit.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.
Press and hold the  or  key to select multiple items.
Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
Click on OK.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.
The test results will be displayed in the status report window.
Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.
TX Calibration Test
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
S MGLI and primary CSM and BDC are INS_ACT (CSM clock valid)
S All BBXs are OOS–RAM (yellow)
S Test equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX
BLO calibration
S LMF is logged in to the BTS in the GUI environment
IMPORTANT
Verify all BBX boards removed and repositioned have been
returned to their assigned shelves/slots. Any BBX boards
moved since being downloaded will have to be
downloaded with code and data again.
If just a TX calibration must be run by itself, follow the procedures in
Table 3-35.
Table 3-35: TX Calibration Test
Step
Action
Configure test equipment for TX path calibration per Table 3-33.
Click on the BBX(s) to be calibrated.
From the Tests menu, select TX Calibration.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list (press and hold the Shift
or Ctrl keyboard key to select multiple items).
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY 3-71
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
Table 3-35: TX Calibration Test
Step
Action
Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
Click OK to display the status report window followed by a Directions pop-up window.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results will be displayed in the
status report window.
Click OK to close the status report window.
Exception Handling
In the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAIL
message in the status report window and provides information in the
Description field.
Recheck the test setup and connection and re–run the test. If the tests fail
again, note specifics about the failure, and refer to Chapter 6,
Troubleshooting.
Download BLO Procedure
After a successful TX path calibration, download the bay level offset
(BLO) calibration file data to the BBX2s. BLO data is extracted from the
CAL file for the Base Transceiver Subsystem (BTS) and downloaded to
the selected BBX2 devices.
NOTE
If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this
procedure does not need to be performed, as BLO is
downloaded as part of the All Cal/Audit.
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding.
S BBXs being downloaded are OOS–RAM (yellow).
S TX calibration successfully completed
After a TX calibration has been performed using the procedure in
Table 3-35, follow the steps in Table 3-36 to download the BLO data to
the BBX2s.
3-72
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
Table 3-36: Download BLO
Step
Action
Select the BBX2(s) to be downloaded.
From the Device menu, select Download BLO.
A status report window displays the result of the download.
NOTE
Selected device(s) do not change color when BLO is downloaded.
Click OK to close the status report window.
Calibration Audit Introduction
The BLO calibration audit procedure confirms the successful generation
and storage of the BLO calibrations. The calibration audit procedure
measures the path gain or loss of every BBX2 transmit path at the site.
In this test, actual system tolerances are used to determine the success or
failure of a test. The same external test equipment set up is used.
IMPORTANT
RF path verification, BLO calibration, and BLO data
download to BBX2s must have been successfully
completed prior to performing the calibration audit.
Transmit (TX) Path Audit
Perform the calibration audit of the TX paths of all equipped BBX2
slots, per the steps in Table 3-37.
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX
OUT connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX2
channels keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury and/or equipment damage.
NOTE
If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this
procedure does not need to be performed, as BLO is
downloaded as part of the All Cal/Audit.
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY 3-73
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
TX Audit Test
The Tests menu item, TX Audit, performs the TX BLO Audit test for a
BBX2(s). All measurements are made through the appropriate TX output
connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.
Prerequisites
Before running this test, the following should be done:
S CSM–1,GLI2s, BBX2s have correct code load.
S Primary CSM and MGLI2 are INS.
S All BBX2s are OOS_RAM.
S Test equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX
BLO calibration.
S LMF is logged into the BTS.
After a TX calibration has been performed using the procedure in
Table 3-35, or if verification of BLO data in the CAL file is required,
connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-15 or Figure 3-16 and
follow the procedure in Table 3-37 to perform the BTS TX Path Audit
test.
Table 3-37: TX Path Audit
Step
Action
Select the BBX2(s) to be audited. From the Tests menu, select TX Audit.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.
Press and hold the  or  key to select multiple items.
Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
Click on OK.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.
A status report window displays the test results.
Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.
Exception Handling
In the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAIL
message in the status report window and provides information in the
Description field.
Recheck the test setup and connection and re–run the test. If the tests fail
again, note specifics about the failure, and refer to Chapter 6,
Troubleshooting.
3-74
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
Create CAL File
The Create Cal File function gets the BLO data from BBXs and
creates/updates the CAL file for the BTS. If a CAL file does not exist a
new one is created. If a CAL file already exists it is updated. After a
BTS has been fully optimized a copy of the CAL file must exist so it can
be transferred to the CBSC. If TX calibration has been successfully
performed for all BBXs and BLO data has been downloaded, a CAL file
will exist. Note the following:
S The Create Cal File function only applies to selected (highlighted)
BBXs.
CAUTION
Editing the CAL file is not encouraged as this action can
cause interface problems between the BTS and the LMF.
To manually edit the CAL file you must first logout of the
BTS. If you manually edit the CAL file and then use the
Create Cal File function the edited information will be lost.
Prerequisites
Before running this test, the following should be done:
S LMF is logged into the BTS
S BBX2s are OOS_RAM with BLO downloaded
Table 3-38: Create CAL File
Step
Action
Select the applicable BBX2s. The CAL file will only be updated for the selected BBX2s.
Click on the Device menu.
Click on the Create Cal File menu item. The status report window displays the results of the action.
Click OK.
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY 3-75
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
RFDS Setup and Calibration
RFDS Description
The optional RFDS is used to perform RF tests of the site from the
CBSC or from the LMF. The RFDS contains the following FRUs:
S Antenna Select Unit (ASU)
S FWT Interface Card (FWTIC)
S Subscriber Unit Assembly (SUA)
For complete information regarding the RFDS, refer to the CDMA
CDMA RFDS Hardware Installation; 68P64113A93, CDMA RFDS
User’s Guide; 68P64114A51, and the LMF Help function.
RFDS Parameter Settings
The bts-#.cdf file includes RFDS parameter settings that must
match the installed RFDS equipment. The paragraphs below describe the
editable parameters and their defaults. Table 3-39 explains how to edit
the parameter settings.
S RfdsEquip – valid inputs are 0 through 2.
0 = (default) RFDS is not equipped
1 = Non-Cobra/Patzer box RFDS
2 = Cobra RFDS
S TsuEquip – valid inputs are 0 or 1
0 = (default) TSU not equipped
1 = TSU is equipped in the system
S MC1....4 – valid inputs are 0 or 1
0 = (default) Not equipped
1 = Multicouplers equipped in RFDS system
(SC9600 internal RFDS only)
S Asu1/2Equip – valid inputs are 0 or 1
0 = (default) Not equipped
1 = Equipped
S TestOrigDN – valid inputs are ’’’ (default) or a numerical string up to
15 characters. (This is the phone number the RFDS dials when
originating a call. A dummy number needs to be set up by the switch,
and is to be used in this field.)
NOTE
Any text editor may be used to open the bts–#.cdf file
to verify, view, or modify data.
3-76
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
Table 3-39: RFDS Parameter Settings
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
Log out of the BTS prior to performing this procedure.
Using a text editor, verify the following fields are set correctly in the bts–#.cdf file (1 = GLI based
RFDS; 2 = Cobra RFDS).
EXAMPLE:
RfdsEquip = 2
TsuEquip = 1
MC1Equip = 0
MC2Equip = 0
MC3Equip = 0
MC4Equip = 0
Asu1Equip = 1
Asu2Equip = 0 (1 if system is non-duplexed)
TestOrigDN = ’123456789’
NOTE
The above is an example of the bts-#.cdf file that should have been generated by the OMC–R and
copied to the LMF. These fields will have been set by the OMC–R if the RFDSPARM database is
modified for the RFDS.
Save and/or quit the editor. If any changes were made to these fields data will need to be downloaded
to the GLI2 (see Step 3, otherwise proceed to Step 4).
To download to the GLI2, click on the Device menu and select the Download Data menu item
(selected devices do not change color when data is downloaded). A status report window is displayed
showing status of the download. Click OK to close the status report window.
! CAUTION
After downloading data to the GLI2 the RFDS LED will slowly begin flashing red and green for
approximately 2–3 minutes. DO NOT attempt to perform any functions with the RFDS until the LED
remains green.
Status the RFDS TSU. A status report is displayed showing the software version number for the TSIC
and SUA.
* IMPORTANT
If the LMF yields an error message, check the following:
Ensure AMR cable is correctly connected from the BTS to the RFDS.
Verify RFDS has power.
Verify RFDS status LED is green.
Verify fields in the bts-#.cdf file are correct (see Step 1).
Status the GLI2 and ensure the device is communicating (via Ethernet) with the LMF, and the
device is in the proper state (INS).
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-77
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
RFDS TSU NAM Programming
The NAM (number assignment module) information needs to be
programmed into the TSU before it can receive and process test calls, or
be used for any type of RFDS test. The RFDS TSU NAM must be
programmed with the appropriate system parameters and phone number
during hardware installation. The TSU phone and TSU MSI must be
recorded for each BTS used for OMC–R RFDS software configuration.
NOTE
The user will only need to program the NAM for the initial
install of the RFDS.
Explanation of Parameters
used when Programming the
TSU NAM
Table 3-40 defines the parameters used when editing the tsu.nam file.
Table 3-40: Definition of Parameters
Access Overload Code
Slot Index
System ID
Network ID
These parameters are obtained from the switch.
Primary Channel A
Primary Channel B
Secondary Channel A
Secondary Channel B
These parameters are the channels which are to be used in operation
of the system.
Lock Code
Security Code
Service Level
Station Class Mark
Do NOT change.
IMSI MCC
IMSI 11 12
These fields are obtained at the OMC using the following command:
OMC000>disp bts–# imsi
If the fields are blank, replace the IMSI fields in the NAM file to 0,
otherwise use the values displayed by the OMC.
MIN Phone Number
These fields are the phone number assigned to the mobile. The ESN
and MIN must be entered into the switch as well.
NOTE
This field is different from the TODN field in the bts-#.cdf file.
The MIN is the phone number of the RFDS subscriber, and the
TODN is the number the subscriber calls.
3-78
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
Valid NAM Ranges
Table 3-41 provides the valid NAM field ranges. If any of the fields are
missing or out-of–range, the RFDS will error out.
Table 3-41: Valid NAM Field Ranges
Valid Range
Minimum
Maximum
Access Overload Code
15
Slot Index
System ID
32767
Network ID
32767
Primary Channel A
25
1175
Primary Channel B
25
1175
Secondary Channel A
25
1175
Secondary Channel B
25
1175
Lock Code
999
Security Code
999999
Service Level
Station Class Mark
255
IMSI 11 12
99
IMSI MCC
999
N/A
N/A
NAM Field Name
MIN Phone Number
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-79
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
Set Antenna Map Data
The antenna map data must be entered manually if an RFDS is installed.
Antenna map data does not have to be entered if an RFDS is not
installed. The antenna map data is only used for RFDS tests and is
required if a RFDS is installed.
Prerequisite
S Logged into the BTS
Table 3-42: Set Antenna Map Data
Step
Action
Click on the Util menu.
Select Edit > Antenna Map > TX or RX. A data entry pop–up window will appear.
Enter/edit values as required for each carrier.
NOTE
Refer to the Util > Edit–antenna map LMF help screen for antenna map examples.
Click on the Save button to save displayed values.
Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window. Values that were entered/changed after the Save
button was used will not be saved.
NOTE
Entered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and
login.
3-80
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
Set RFDS Configuration Data
If an RFDS is installed the RFDS configuration data must be manually
entered.
Prerequisite
S Logged into the BTS
IMPORTANT
The entered antenna# index numbers must correspond to
the antenna# index numbers used in the antenna maps.
Table 3-43: Set RFDS Configuration Data
Step
Action
Click on the Util menu.
Select Edit > RFDS Configuration > TX or RX. A data entry pop–up window will appear.
Click on the Add Row button to add a new antenna number. Then click in the other columns and enter
the desired data.
To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.
NOTE
Refer to the Util > Edit–RFDS Configuration LMF help screen for RFDS configuration data
examples.
To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.
Click on the Save button to save displayed values.
Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window. Values that were entered/changed after the Save
button was used will not be saved.
NOTE
Entered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and
login.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-81
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
RFDS Calibration
The RFDS Calibration option is used to calibrate the RFDS TX and RX
paths. For a TX antenna path calibration the BTS XCVR is keyed at a
pre–determined power level and the BTS power output level is measured
by the RFDS. The power level is then measured at the TX antenna
directional coupler by the power measuring test equipment item being
used (power meter or analyzer). The difference (offset) between the
power level at the RFDS and the power level at the TX antenna
directional coupler is used as the TX RFDS calibration offset value.
For an RX antenna path calibration the RFDS is keyed at a
pre–determined power level and the power input level is measured by the
BTS XCVR. A CDMA signal at the same power level measured by the
BTS XCVR is then injected at the RX antenna directional coupler by the
CDMA communications analyzer. The difference (offset) between the
RFDS keyed power level and power level measured at the BTS XCVR is
the RFDS RX calibration offset value.
The TX and RX RFDS calibration offset values are written to the CAL
file.
For each RFDS TSIC, the channel frequency is determined at the lower
third and upper third of the appropriate band using the frequencies listed
in Table 3-44.
Table 3-44: RFDS TSIC Calibration Channel Frequencies
System
Channel Calibration Points
800 MHz (A and B)
341 and 682
1.9 GHz
408 and 791
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX
OUT connector, verify that there are no CDMA BBX
channels keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury and/or equipment damage.
Prerequisites
S BBX2s are INS_TEST
S Cable calibration has been performed
S TX calibration has been performed and BLO has been downloaded for
the BTS
S Test equipment has been connected correctly for a TX calibration
S Test equipment has been selected and calibrated
3-82
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
Table 3-45: RFDS Calibration
Step
Action
Select the RFDS tab.
Click on the RFDS menu.
Click on the RFDS Calibration menu item.
Select the appropriate direction (TX/RX) in the Direction pick list.
Enter the appropriate channel number(s) in the Channels box. Separate the channel numbers with a
comma or a dash if more than one channel number is entered (e.g., 247,585,742 or 385–395 for
through).
Select the appropriate carrier(s) in the Carriers pick list (use the Shift or Ctrl key to select multiple
carriers).
Select the appropriate RX branch (Both, Main, or Diversity) in the RX Branch pick list.
Select the appropriate baud rate (1=9600, 2=14400) in the Rate Set pick list.
11
Click on the OK button. A status report window is displayed, followed by a Directions pop–up
window.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. Test results are displayed in the status
report window.
Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
12
Click on the BTS tab.
13
Click on the MGLI.
14
Download the CAL file which has been updated with the RFDS offset data to the selected GLI device
by clicking on Device > Download Data from the tab menu bar and pulldown.
10
NOTE
The MGLI will automatically transfer the RFDS offset data from the CAL file to the RFDS.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-83
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
Program TSU NAM
Follow the procedure in Table 3-46 to program the TSU NAM. The
NAM must be programmed before it can receive and process test calls,
or be used for any type of RFDS test.
Prerequisites
S MGLI is INS.
S TSU is powered up and has a code load.
Table 3-46: Program NAM Procedure
Step
Action
Select the RFDS tab.
Select the TSU tab.
Click on the TSU menu.
Click on the Program TSU NAM menu item.
Enter the appropriate information in the boxes (see Table 3-40 and Table 3-41) .
Click on the OK button to display the status report.
Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
3-84
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Alarms Testing
Alarm Verification
The alarms testing should be performed at a convenient point in the
optimization/ATP process, since the LMF is necessary to ensure that the
SC4812ET Lite is generating the appropriate alarms.
The SC 4812ET Lite is capable of concurrently monitoring 10 customer
defined input signals and four customer defined outputs, which interface
to the 50–pair punchblock. All alarms are defaulted to “Not Equipped”
during ATP testing. Testing of these inputs is achieved by triggering the
alarms and monitoring the LMF for state–transition messages from the
active MGLI2.
Alarm Reporting Display
The Alarm Monitor window can be displayed to list alarms that occur
after the window is displayed. To access the Alarm Monitor window,
select Util > Alarm Monitor.
The following buttons are included.
S The Options button allows for a severity level (Warning, Minor,
Major, Critical, and Unknown) selection. The default is all levels.
To change the level of alarms reported click on the Options button
and highlight the desired alarm level(s). To select multiple levels press
the Ctrl key (for individual selections) or Shift key (for a range of
selections) while clicking on the desired levels.
S The Pause button can be used to pause/stop the display of alarms.
When the Pause button is clicked the name of the button changes to
Continue. When the Continue button is click the display of alarms
will continue. Alarms that occur between the time the Pause button is
clicked and the Continue button is clicked will not be displayed.
S The Clear button can be used to clear the Alarm Monitor display.
New alarms that occur after the Clear button is clicked will be
displayed.
S The Dismiss button is used to dismiss/close the Alarm Monitor
display.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-85
Alarms Testing – continued
Alarm Testing Set–up
Prepare for any alarm testing by following the procedures in Table 3-47.
Table 3-47: Alarm Testing Preparation
Step
Action
If it has not already been done, refer to the procedure in Table 3-6 to interface the CDMA LMF
computer terminal to the frame LAN A connector.
If it has not already been done, refer to Table 3-7 to start a GUI LMF session.
Click on Util in the menu bar and select Alarm Monitor... from the pulldown.
S An Alarm Monitor window will open.
Heat Exchanger Alarm Test
Table 3-48 gives instructions on testing the Heat Exchanger alarm.
Table 3-48: Heat Exchanger Alarm
Step
Action
Set one of the two DC PDA heat exchanger circuit breakers to OFF. This will generate a heat
exchanger alarm. Be sure that the CDMA LMF reports the correct alarm condition.
Alarm condition will be reported as BTS Relay #14, BTS Relay #15, BTS Relay #16, BTS Relay
#17, BTS Relay #18, with Contact Alarm Open*Clear*, respectively.
Set the circuit breaker turned off in step 1 to ON. Ensure that the alarm conditions have cleared on
the CDMA LMF with Contact Alarm Closed*Clear* for each reported BTS relay.
NOTE
The heat exchanger will go through the start–up sequence.
Door Alarm
Table 3-49 gives instructions on testing the door alarms.
Table 3-49: ACLC and Power Entry Door Alarm
Step
Action
Close the ACLC and power entry compartment doors on the frame. Ensure that no alarms are reported
on the CDMA LMF.
Individually open and then close the ACLC and power entry compartment door. Ensure that the
CDMA LMF reports an alarm when each door is opened.
Alarm condition will be reported as BTS Relay #27 contact.
3-86
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Alarms Testing – continued
AC Fail Alarm
Table 3-50 gives instructions on testing the AC Fail Alarm.
Table 3-50: AC Fail Alarm
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
S Back–up batteries must be installed when performing this test.
S To prevent inadvertently shutting down the RF compartment electronics, the batteries should be
charged before performing this test.
Set the ACLC MAIN circuit breaker to OFF.
S The CDMA LMF should report an alarm for an AC Fail condition as BTS Relay #21, BTS Relay
#23, BTS Relay #24, and BTS Relay #29 contacts, respectively.
S On the MAP, the MAJOR ALARM (red), MINOR ALARM (amber), and RECTIFIER FAIL (red)
LEDs should light.
S On the rectifiers, the DC and PWR LEDs should light red.
Set the ACLC MAIN circuit breaker to ON.
S On the CDMA LMF, the AC Fail alarm should clear.
S On the MAP, the MAJOR ALARM, MINOR ALARM, and RECTIFIER FAIL LEDs should
extinguish.
S On the rectifiers, the DC and PWR LEDs should change to green.
Minor Alarm
Table 3-51 gives instructions on performing a test to display a minor
alarm.
Table 3-51: Minor Alarm
Step
Action
Set the TCP switch on the MAP to OFF. This will generate a minor alarm.
S The CDMA LMF should report the minor alarm as BTS Relay #24 contacts.
S The TC DISABLE (red) and MINOR ALARM (amber) LEDs on the MAP should light.
Set the TCP switch to ON. The alarm condition indications should clear.
Rectifier Alarms
The following series of tests are for single rectifier modules in a multiple
rectifier system. The systems include a three rectifier and a four rectifier
system.
Single Rectifier Failure
(Three Rectifier System)
Table 3-52 gives instructions on testing single rectifier failure or minor
alarm in a three (3) rectifier system (single–carrier system). Procedures
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-87
Alarms Testing – continued
in this test are for a frame configured for single carrier operation with
rectifiers installed in rectifier shelf positions 2, 3, and 4, from left to
right when facing the frame.
Table 3-52: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor Alarm, Single–Carrier System
Step
Action
! CAUTION
Only perform this test if the rectifier current load displayed on the AMP indicator on the MAP is
125 amps or less. Sufficient current capability to support a greater load may not be available when
one rectifier is removed from the bus.
On the ACLC, set the RECT. 2/4 circuit breaker to OFF.
S The DC and PWR LEDs should light red on the rectifier in shelf position 2.
S The MINOR ALARM (amber) and RECTIFIER FAIL (red) LEDs on the MAP should light.
S The CDMA LMF should report an alarm condition as BTS Relay #21 and BTS Relay #24
contacts, respectively.
Set the RECT. 2/4 circuit breaker on the ACLC to ON.
S All alarm indications should clear on the rectifier, MAP, and CDMA LMF.
Multiple Rectifier Failure
(Three Rectifier System)
Table 3-53 gives instructions on testing multiple rectifier failure or major
alarm in a three (3) rectifier system (single–carrier system). Procedures
in this test are for a frame configured for single carrier operation with
rectifiers installed in rectifier shelf positions 2, 3, and 4, from left to
right when facing the frame.
Table 3-53: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm, Single–Carrier System
Step
Action
! CAUTION
Only perform this test if the rectifier current load displayed on the AMP indicator on the MAP is 65
amps or less. Sufficient current capability to support a greater load may not be available when two
rectifiers are removed from the bus.
On the ACLC, set the RECT. 1/3 circuit breaker to OFF.
S The DC and PWR LEDs should light red on the rectifiers in shelf positions 1 and 3.
S The MAJOR ALARM (red), MINOR ALARM (amber), and RECTIFIER FAIL (red) LEDs on the
MAP should light.
S The CDMA LMF should report an alarm condition as BTS Relay #21, BTS Relay #24, and BTS
Relay #29 contacts, respectively.
Set the RECT. 1/3 circuit breaker on the ACLC to ON.
S All alarm indications should clear on the rectifiers, MAP, and CDMA LMF.
3-88
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Alarms Testing – continued
Single Rectifier Failure
(Four Rectifier System)
Table 3-54 gives instructions on testing single rectifier failure or minor
alarm in a four (4) rectifier system (two–carrier system).
Table 3-54: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor Alarm, Two–Carrier System
Step
Action
! CAUTION
Only perform this test if the rectifier current load displayed on the AMP indicator on the MAP is
125 amps or less. Sufficient current capability to support a greater load may not be available when
two rectifiers are removed from the bus in the following steps.
Unseat the rectifier in shelf position 4 from its connection at the rear of the shelf, but do not
completely remove it from the shelf.
S The rectifier 4 DC and PWR LEDs may light red momentarily and extinguish. There should be no
other indications on the frame or CDMA LMF.
On the ACLC, set the RECT. 2/4 circuit breaker to OFF.
S The rectifier 2 DC and PWR LEDs should light red.
S The MINOR ALARM (amber) and RECTIFIER FAIL (red) LEDs on the MAP should light.
S The CDMA LMF should report an alarm condition as BTS Relay #21 and BTS Relay #24
contacts, respectively.
Re–seat the rectifier in shelf position 4 into its connection at the rear of the shelf.
On the ACLC, set the RECT. 2/4 circuit breaker to ON.
S The rectifier DC and PWR LEDs should light green.
S All alarm indications should clear on the rectifiers, MAP, and CDMA LMF.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-89
Alarms Testing – continued
Multiple Rectifier Failure
(Four Rectifier System)
Table 3-55 gives instructions on testing multiple rectifier failure or major
alarm in a four (4) rectifier system (two–carrier system).
Table 3-55: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm, Two–Carrier System
Step
Action
! CAUTION
Only perform this test if the rectifier current load displayed on the AMP indicator on the MAP is
125 amps or less. Sufficient current capability to support a greater load may not be available when
two rectifiers are removed from the bus.
On the ACLC, set the RECT. 2/4 circuit breaker to OFF.
S The DC and PWR LEDs should light red on the rectifiers in shelf positions 2 and 4.
S The MAJOR ALARM (red), MINOR ALARM (amber), and RECTIFIER FAIL (red) LEDs on the
MAP should light.
S The CDMA LMF should report an alarm condition as BTS Relay #21, BTS Relay #24, and BTS
Relay #29 contacts, respectively.
Set the RECT. 2/4 circuit breaker on the ACLC to ON.
S All alarm indications should clear on the rectifiers, MAP, and CDMA LMF.
Battery Over Temperature
Alarm (Optional)
CAUTION
Use special care to avoid damaging insulation on cables, or
damaging battery cases when using a heat gun.
Table 3-56 gives instructions on testing the battery over–temperature
alarm system.
Table 3-56: Battery Over–Temperature Alarm
Step
Action
Use a low–powered heat gun to gently heat the battery over–temperature sensor (see location in
Figure 3-21).
! CAUTION
To avoid damaging the cable insulation, do not hold the hot air gun closer than three (3) inches from
the sensor.
3-90
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Alarms Testing – continued
Table 3-56: Battery Over–Temperature Alarm
Step
Action
NOTE
When the over–temperature alarm point is reached, an audible click will sound as DC PDA relay K1
contacts engage and relay K2 contacts disengage (make–before–break operation).
When the sensor is heated to approximately 51° C, a battery over–temperature alarm is generated with
the following indications.
S On the MAP, the CHARGE DISABLE LED (red) should light and the MAIN CONN. ENABLE
LED (green) should extinguish.
S The CDMA LMF should display an alarm condition as BTS Relay #22 contacts.
Switch the hot air gun to cool. Cool the sensor until the K1 and K2 contacts return to normal position
(K1 open and K2 closed). The following indications that alarms have cleared should occur:
S On the MAP, the CHARGE DISABLE LED (red) should extinguish and the MAIN CONN.
ENABLE (green) LED should light.
S The alarm reported on CDMA LMF will clear
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-91
Alarms Testing – continued
Figure 3-21: Battery Over–Temperature Sensor
Bus Bar
6 AWG Cables
Battery Overtemp Sensor
Negative Temperature Compensation Sensor
SC4812ETL0014–1
3-92
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Alarms Testing – continued
Rectifier Over Temperature
Alarm
Table 3-57 gives instructions on testing the rectifier over–temperature
alarm system.
Table 3-57: Rectifier Over–Temperature Alarm
Step
Action
Remove the 14 tamper–resistant Torx fasteners securing the rear access panel to the rear of the frame
(Figure 2-1), and remove the rear access panel.
NOTE
Panel fastener type can be either T–27 button head or T–30 pan head.
Looking up through the frame rear access opening, locate the rear of the MAP.
Remove the jumper plug from connector J8 on the rear panel of the MAP (Figure 3-22). The
following conditions should occur:
S Contacts on K1 and K2 change states (K1 now closed and K2 open).
S The CDMA LMF reports an alarm condition as BTS Relay #26 contacts.
Reinstall the jumper plug in connector J8, and verify that all alarm conditions have cleared.
Reinstall the frame rear access panel, securing it with the 14 tamper–resistant Torx fasteners removed
in step 1.
Figure 3-22: MAP Connector J8 (Rear of MAP)
J12
J3
J8
J9
J7
J4
J5
J1
J2
CONNECTOR J8
SC4812ETL0021–1
Before Leaving the site
If no further operations are required after performing the alarm tests,
complete the requirements in Table 5-8 before leaving the site.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
3-93
Alarms Testing – continued
Notes
3-94
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Chapter 4: Automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP)
Table of Contents
08/01/2001
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure – Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX/RX Antenna Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-2
Acceptance Tests – Test Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acceptance Test Equipment Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3
4-3
4-3
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All–inclusive Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All TX/RX ATP Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All TX ATP Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All RX ATP Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4
4-4
4-5
4-5
4-6
Individual Acceptance Tests–Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Individual Acceptance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Individual Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7
4-7
4-7
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spectral Purity TX Mask Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9
4-9
4-10
TX Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12
4-12
4-12
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13
4-13
4-13
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-15
4-15
4-15
RX FER Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FER Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-18
4-18
4-19
Generating an ATP Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATP Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-20
4-20
4-20
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure – Introduction
Introduction
The automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP) allows Cellular Field
Engineers (CFEs) to run automated acceptance tests on all equipped BTS
subsystem devices using the CDMA LMF GUI environment and
supported test equipment.
The operator can choose to save the results of these tests to a report file,
from which ATP reports are generated for later printout.
Perform the ATP test on out-of-service sectors or sites only. Because all
tests are controlled via the CDMA LMF computer using the GPIB
interface from the CDMA LMF computer, only recommended test
equipment supported by the CDMA LMF can be used.
IMPORTANT
Before using the LMF, use an editor to view the
”CAVEATS” section in the ”readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmf
folder for any applicable information.
IMPORTANT
The ATP test is to be performed on out-of-service sectors
only.
DO NOT substitute test equipment with other models not
supported by the LMF.
NOTE
Refer to Chapter 3 for detailed information on test set
connections for calibrating equipment, cables and other test
set components, if required.
The CFE selects the appropriate ATP tests to run to satisfy customer and
regulatory requirements for verifying cell site performance. These tests
can be run individually or as one of the following groups:
S All TX: TX tests verify the performance of the BTS transmit
elements. These include the GLI2, MCC, BBX2, BDC, and trunking
modules, the LPAs, and passive components including splitters,
combiners, bandpass filter(s), and RF cables.
S All RX: RX tests verify the performance of the BTS receive elements.
These include the MPC (for starter frames), , BBX2, MCC, and GLI2
modules, and the passive components including RX filter (starter
frame only), and RF cables.
S All TX/RX: Executes all TX and RX tests.
S Full Optimization: Executes the TX calibration, downloads BLO,
and executes the TX audit before running all TX and RX tests.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
4-1
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure – Introduction – continued
Prerequisites
Before attempting to run any ATP tests, all applicable procedures
outlined in Chapter 3, Optimization/Calibration, must have been
completed successfully (i.e., code load and BLO calibration).
NOTE
You cannot substitute test equipment with other models not
supported by the CDMA LMF.
Before attempting to run any ATP tests, ensure the following:
S BTS has been optimized and calibrated (see Chapter 3).
S LMF is logged into the BTS
S CSMs, GLI2s, BBX2s, MCCs and TSU (if the RFDS is installed)
have correct code load and data load
Primary CSM and GLI2 are INS_ACT
MCCs are INS_ACT
BBX2s are OOS-RAM
BBX2s are calibrated and BLOs are downloaded
Test cables are calibrated
Test equipment is selected
Test equipment is connected for ATP tests
Test equipment has been warmed up 60 minutes and calibrated
GPIB is on
WARNING
Before the FER is run, be sure that all LPAs are turned
OFF (circuit breakers pulled) or that all transmitter
connectors are properly terminated.
All transmit connectors must be properly terminated for all
ATP tests.
Failure to observe these warnings may result in bodily
injury or equipment damage.
TX/RX Antenna Connections
Refer to Figure 1-6 or Figure 1-7 for identification of the transmit and
receive antenna connections where measurement are to be taken.
Directional couplers for signal sampling by the RFDS, if installed, are
integral to the SC4812ET Lite transmit and receive paths in the DRDCs
and TRDCs. As a result, all ATP measurement connections are made at
the antenna connectors on the RF interface panel.
4-2
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Acceptance Tests – Test Set Up
Required Test Equipment
The following test equipment is required:
S LMF
S Power meter (used with HP8921A/600 and Advantest R3465)
S Communications test set
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX
OUT connector, verify that there are no CDMA channels
keyed.
At active sites, have the OMCR/CBSC place the carrier
assigned to the LPAs under test OOS. Failure to do so can
result in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.
NOTE
You must recalibrate the test equipment before using it to
perform the TX Acceptance Tests.
Acceptance Test Equipment
Set Up
Follow the steps in Table 4-1 to set up test equipment for all tests.
Table 4-1: Set Up Test Equipment – TX Output Verify/Control Tests
Step
Action
If it has not already been done, interface the LMF computer to the BTS (refer to Table 3-6 and
Figure 3-10).
If it has not already been done, refer to Table 3-7 to start a GUI LMF session and log into the BTS.
If it has not already been done, refer to Figure 3-17 or Figure 3-18, as applicable for the test
equipment being used, to connect test equipment for acceptance testing.
* IMPORTANT
CDMA LMF–based measurement commands factor in TX test cable loss between the RFM frame and
test equipment. No additional attenuation can be inserted as the additional losses would not be
factored in.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
68P09253A60
PRELIMINARY
4-3
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests
All–inclusive Tests
The all–inclusive acceptance tests are performed from the LMF GUI
environment. These tests execute various combinations of individual
acceptance tests with a single command. This allows verification of
multiple aspects of BTS performance while minimizing time needed for
individual test set up and initiation.
There are three abbreviated acceptance tests which evaluate different
performance aspects of the BTS. This allows the CFE to select testing to
meet the specific requirements for individual maintenance and
performance verification situations. The following summarizes the
coverage of each abbreviated test:
S All TX/RX. Performs all transmit and receive ATPs on the selected
MCCs and BBX2s.
S All TX. Performs complete set of transmit ATPs on the selected
MCCs and BBX2s. Testing is the equivalent of performing all of the
following individual tests:
– TX Mask Test
– Rho Test
– Pilot Time Offset Test
– Code Domain Power Test
S All RX. Performs complete receive ATP on the selected MCCs and
BBX2s. Testing is the equivalent of performing the following:
– FER Test
4-4
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests – continued
All TX/RX ATP Test
Follow the procedures in Table 4-2 to perform the abbreviated,
all–inclusive transmit and receive test.
Table 4-2: All TX/RX ATP Test Procedure
Step
Action
Set up the test equipment initially for abbreviated tests per Table 4-1.
Select the BBX2s and MCCs to be tested.
From the Tests menu, select All TX/RX.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick
list.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.
Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in the
status report window.
Click Save Results or Dismiss.
NOTE
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file.
All TX ATP Test
Follow the procedures in Table 4-3 to perform the abbreviated,
all–inclusive transmit test.
Table 4-3: All TX ATP Test Procedure
Step
Action
Set up the test equipment for abbreviated tests per Table 4-1.
Select the BBX2s and MCCs to be tested.
From the Tests menu, select All TX.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick
list.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.
Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in the
status report window.
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
4-5
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests – continued
Table 4-3: All TX ATP Test Procedure
Step
Action
Click Save Results or Dismiss.
NOTE
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file.
All RX ATP Test
Follow the procedures in Table 4-4 to perform the abbreviated,
all–inclusive receive test.
Table 4-4: All RX ATP Test Procedure
Step
Action
Set up the test equipment for abbreviated tests per Table 4-1.
Select the BBX2s and MCCs to be tested.
From the Tests menu, select All RX.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick
list.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.
Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in the
status report window.
Click Save Results or Dismiss.
NOTE
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file.
4-6
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Individual Acceptance Tests–Introduction
Individual Acceptance Tests
The following individual ATP tests can be used to evaluate specific
aspects of BTS operation against individual performance requirements.
All testing is performed using the CDMA LMF GUI environment.
TX Testing
TX tests verify any given transmit antenna path and output power
control. All tests are performed using the external calibrated test set. All
measurements are via the appropriate TX OUT connector.
TX tests verify TX operation of the entire CDMA Forward Link using
all BBX2s assigned to all respective sector/antennas. Each BBX2 is
keyed up to generate a CDMA carrier (using both bbx level and bay
level offsets) at the CDF file carrier output power level (as specified in
the site documentation).
RX Testing
RX testing verifies any given receive antenna path. All tests are
performed using the external calibrated test set to inject a CDMA RF
carrier with all zero longcode at the specified RX frequency via the
appropriate RX IN connector.
RX tests verify RX operation of the entire CDMA Reverse Link using
all equipped MCCs assigned to all respective sector/antennas.
Individual Tests
Spectral Purity TX Mask
This test verifies that the transmitted CDMA carrier waveform generated
on each sector meets the transmit spectral mask specification (as defined
in IS–97) with respect to the assigned cdf file values.
Waveform Quality (Rho)
This test verifies that the transmitted Pilot channel element digital
waveform quality (rho) exceeds the minimum specified value in IS–97.
Rho represents the correlation between the actual and perfect CDMA
modulation spectrums. 1.0000 represents 100% (or perfect correlation).
Pilot Time Offset
The Pilot Time Offset is the difference between the CDMA analyzer
measurement interval (based on the BTS system time reference) and the
incoming block of transmitted data from the BTS (Pilot only, Walsh
code 0).
Code Domain Power/Noise Floor
This test verifies the code domain power levels, which have been set for
all ODD numbered Walsh channels, using the OCNS command. This is
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
4-7
Individual Acceptance Tests–Introduction – continued
done by verifying that the ratio of PILOT divided by OCNS is equal to
10.2 + 2 dB, and, that the noise floor of all EVEN numbered “OFF”
Walsh channels measures < –27 dB (with respect to total CDMA channel
power).
BTS Frame Error Rate
This test verifies the BTS receive Frame Error Rate (FER) on all Traffic
Channel elements currently configured on all equipped MCCs (fullrate at
one percent FER) at an RF input level of –119 dBm on the main RX
antenna paths using all equipped MCCs and BBX2s at the site. The
diversity RX antenna paths are also tested using the lowest equipped
MCC/CE ONLY.
NOTE
There are no pass/fail criteria associated with FER readings
taken at level below –119 dBm, other than to verify that
the FER measurement reflects changes in the RX input
signal level.
4-8
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test
Background
This test verifies the spectral purity of each BBX carrier keyed up at a
specific frequency per the current CDF file assignment. All tests are
performed using the external calibrated test set controlled by the same
command. All measurements are via the appropriate TX OUT connector.
Pilot gain will be set to 541 for each antenna, and the forward link will
be disabled for all Traffic CHannel (TCH) elements from the MCCs. The
BBX2 will be keyed up using both bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to
generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot channel element only). RF output
will be set at 40 dBm as measured at the appropriate TX output.
The calibrated communications test set will measure and return the
attenuation level of all spurious and IM products with respect to the
mean power of the CDMA channel measured in a 1.23 MHz bandwidth,
in dB, verifying that results meet system tolerances at the following test
points (see also Figure 4-1):
S For 800 MHz:
–
–
–
–
At least –45 dB @ + 750 kHz from center frequency
At least –45 dB @ – 750 kHz from center frequency
At least –60 dB @ –1980 kHz from center frequency
At least –60 dB @ + 1980 kHz from center frequency
S For 1.9 GHz:
– At least –45 dB @ + 900 kHz from center frequency
– At least –45 dB @ – 900 kHz from center frequency
The BBX2 will then dekey, and if selected, the redundant BBX2 will be
assigned to the current TX antenna path under test. The test will then be
repeated.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
4-9
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test – continued
Spectral Purity TX Mask
Acceptance Test
Follow the steps in Table 4-5 to verify the transmit spectral mask
specification on all TX antenna paths using all BBXs equipped at the
BTS.
Table 4-5: Test Spectral Purity Transmit Mask
Step
Action
Set up the test equipment for TX acceptance tests per Table 4-1.
Select the BBX2s to be tested.
From the Tests menu, select TX Mask.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick
list.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.
Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in the
status report window.
Click Save Results or Dismiss.
NOTE
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file.
4-10
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test – continued
Figure 4-1: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display
Mean CDMA Bandwidth
Power Reference
.5 MHz Span/Div
Ampl 10 dB/Div
Center Frequency Reference
Attenuation level of all
spurious and IM products
with respect to the mean
power of the CDMA channel
– 1980 kHz
+ 1980 kHz
– 900 kHz
– 750 kHz
08/01/2001
+ 900 kHz
+750 kHz
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
4-11
TX Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance Test
Background
This test verifies the transmitted pilot channel element digital waveform
quality of each BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the
current CDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the external
calibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurements
are via the appropriate TX OUT connector.
Pilot gain will be set to 262 for each antenna, and all TCH elements
from the MCCs will be forward link disabled. The BBX2 will be keyed
up using both bbxlvl and bay level offsets to generate a CDMA carrier
(with pilot channel element only, Walsh code 0). RF output power is set
at 40 dBm as measured at the appropriate TX output.
The calibrated communications test set will measure and return the pilot
channel element digital waveform quality (rho) percentage, verifying
that the result meets system tolerances:
Waveform quality (Rho) should be > 0.912.
The BBX2 will then dekey, and if selected, the redundant BBX2 will be
assigned to the current TX antenna path under test. The test will then be
repeated.
Waveform Quality (Rho)
Acceptance Test
Follow the steps in Table 4-6 to verify the pilot channel element
waveform quality (rho) on the specified TX antenna paths using BBXs
equipped at the BTS.
Table 4-6: Test Waveform Quality (Rho)
Step
Action
Set up the test equipment for TX acceptance tests per Table 4-1.
Select the BBX2s to be tested.
From the Tests menu, select Rho.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick
list.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.
Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in the
status report window.
Click Save Results or Dismiss.
NOTE
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file.
4-12
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test
Background
This test verifies the transmitted pilot channel element Pilot Time Offset
of each BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the current
CDF file assignment. All tests will be performed using the external
calibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurements
will be via the TX OUT connector.
The pilot gain will be set to 262 for each antenna and all TCH elements
from the MCCs will be forward link disabled. The BBX2 will be keyed
up using both bbxlvl and bay level offsets to generate a CDMA carrier
(with pilot channel element only, Walsh code 0). TX power output is set
at 40 dBm as measured at the TX output.
The calibrated communications test set will measure and return the Pilot
Time Offset in ms, verifying that results meet system tolerances:
Pilot Time Offset should be within 3 ms of the target PT Offset
(zero ms).
The BBX2 will then dekey, and if selected, the redundant BBX2 will be
assigned to the current TX antenna path under test. The test will then be
repeated.
NOTE
This test also executes and returns the TX Frequency and
TX Waveform Quality (rho) ATP tests, however, only Pilot
Time Offset results are written to the ATP test report.
Pilot Time Offset Acceptance
Test
Follow the steps in Table 4-7 to verify the Pilot Time Offset on the
specified TX antenna paths using BBXs and BDCs equipped at the BTS.
Table 4-7: Test Pilot Time Offset
Step
Action
Set up the test equipment for TX acceptance tests per Table 4-1.
Select the BBX2s to be tested.
From the Tests menu, select Pilot Time Offset.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick
list.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.
Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
4-13
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Tests – continued
Table 4-7: Test Pilot Time Offset
Step
Action
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in the
status report window.
Click Save Results or Dismiss.
NOTE
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file.
4-14
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test
Background
This test verifies the Code Domain Power and Noise Floor of each BBX
carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the current CDF file
assignment. All tests are performed using the external calibrated test set
controlled by the same command. All measurements are via the
appropriate TX OUT connector.
Pilot gain will be set to 262 for each antenna and all equipped MCCs
will be configured to supply all odd–numbered Walsh code Traffic
channel elements by enabling Orthagonal Channel Noise Source
(OCNS) on all odd MCC/CEs, (maximum 32 full rate channels with an
OCNS gain of 81). All even–numbered Walsh code Traffic channel
elements will not have OCNS enabled, and are considered “OFF”. All
equipped MCCs will be forward–link enabled for the antenna/sector
under test.
The BBX2 will be keyed up using both bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to
generate a CDMA carrier consisting of pilot and OCNS channels. RF
output power is set at 40 dBm as measured at the appropriate TX output.
The calibrated communications test set will measure and return the
channel element power (dB) of all specified Walsh channels within the
CDMA spectrum. Additional calculations will be performed to verify the
following parameters are met (Figure 4-2):
S Traffic channel element power level will be verified by calculating the
ratio of PILOT power to OCNS gain of all traffic channels (root sum
of the square (RSS) of each OCNS gain divided by the Pilot power).
This value should be 10.2 dB + 2.0 dB.
S Noise floor (unassigned “OFF” even numbered Walsh channels) are
verified to be < –27 dB (with respect to total CDMA channel power).
The BBX2 will then dekey, and if selected, the redundant BBX2 will be
assigned to the current TX antenna path under test. The test will then be
repeated. Upon completion of the test, OCNS channels will be disabled
on the specified MCC/CEs.
Code Domain Power/Noise
Floor Test
Follow the steps in Table 4-8 to verify the Code Domain Power/Noise
floor of each BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
4-15
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test – continued
Table 4-8: Test Code Domain Power/Noise Floor
Step
Action
Set up the test equipment for TX acceptance tests per Table 4-1.
Select the BBX2s and MCCs to be tested.
From the Tests menu, select TX Mask.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick
list.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.
Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in the
status report window.
Click Save Results or Dismiss.
NOTE
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file.
4-16
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test – continued
Figure 4-2: Code Domain Analyzer CD Power/Noise Floor Display Examples
Pilot Channel
PILOT LEVEL
MAX OCNS
CHANNEL
8.2 dB
12.2 dB
MAX OCNS SPEC.
Active channels
MIN OCNS SPEC.
MIN OCNS
CHANNEL
MAX NOISE
FLOOR
MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR:
< –27 dB SPEC.
Inactive channels
Walsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
...
64
Code Domain Power/Noise Floor (OCNS Pass) Example
Pilot Channel
PILOT LEVEL
FAILURE – EXCEEDS
MAX OCNS SPEC.
8.2 dB
12.2 dB
MAX OCNS SPEC.
Active channels
FAILURE – DOES NOT
MEET MIN OCNS SPEC.
MIN OCNS SPEC.
FAILURE – EXCEEDS MAX
NOISE FLOOR SPEC.
MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR:
< –27 dB
Inactive channels
Walsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
...
64
Code Domain Power/Noise Floor (OCNS Failure) Example
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
4-17
RX FER Acceptance Test
Background
This test verifies the BTS Frame Erasure Rate (FER) on all TCHs
currently configured on all equipped MCCs (fullrate at 1% FER) at –119
dBm on the main RX antenna paths. The test is performed on all
diversity RX antenna path using only the lowest equipped MCC/CE. All
tests are performed using the external calibrated test set as the signal
source controlled by the same command. All measurements are via the
LMF.
Pilot gain will be set to 262 for each TX antenna, and the forward link
for all TCH elements from the MCCs will be disabled. The BBX2 will
be keyed up using only bbxlvl level offsets, to generate a CDMA
carrier (with pilot channel element only). TX power output is set at +10
dBm. (The BBX must be keyed in order to enable the RX receive
circuitry.)
The LMF will prompt the MCC/CE under test to measure all–zero
longcode and provide the Frame Erasure Rate (FER) report on the
selected active MCC on the Reverse Link for both the main and diversity
RX antenna paths, verifying results meet the following specification:
FER returned less than 1% and Total Frames measured is 1500.
The BBX2 will then dekey, and if selected, the redundant BBX2 will be
assigned to the current RX antenna paths under test. The test will then be
repeated.
4-18
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
RX FER Acceptance Test – continued
FER Acceptance Test
Follow the steps in Table 4-9 to verify the FER on all RX antenna paths
using all BBXs equipped at the BTS.
Table 4-9: Test FER
Step
Action
Set up the test equipment for RX acceptance tests per Table 4-1.
Select the BBX2s and MCCs to be tested.
From the Tests menu, select FER.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick
list.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.
Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
From the RX Branch pick list, select the branch/branches to be tested.
Select the desired rate from the Rate Set pick list (1 = 9600, 2 = 14400).
Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in the
status report window.
Click Save Results or Dismiss.
10
NOTE
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
4-19
Generating an ATP Report
Background
Each time an ATP test is run, an ATP report is updated and must be
saved using the Save Results button to close the status report window.
The ATP report will not be updated if the status reports window is closed
using the Dismiss button.
ATP Report
A separate report is created for each BTS and includes the following for
each test:
Test name
PASS or FAIL
Description information (if applicable)
BBX number
Channel number
Carrier number
Sector number
Upper test limit
Lower test limit
Test result
Time stamp
Details/Warning information (if applicable)
Follow the procedures in the Table 4-10 to view and create a printable
file for the ATP report.
Table 4-10: Generating an ATP Report
Step
Action
Click on the Login tab (if not in the forefront).
Select the desired BTS from the available Base Station pick list.
Click on the Report button.
Click on a column heading to start the report.
If not desiring a printable file copy, click on the Dismiss button.
If requiring a printable file copy, select the desired file, type in the pick list and click on the Save
button.
4-20
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Chapter 5: Leaving the Site
Table of Contents
08/01/2001
Updating Calibration Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Updating CBSC Calibration Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
5-1
Prepare to Leave the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing External Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset All Devices and Initialize Site Remotely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bringing Modules into Service with the CDMA LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminating LMF Session/Removing Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting BTS T1/E1 Spans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before Leaving the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3
5-3
5-3
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-5
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Updating Calibration Data Files
Updating CBSC Calibration
Data Files
After completing the TX calibration and audit, updated CAL file
information must be moved from the LMF Windows environment back
to the CBSC, a Unix environment. The following procedures detail
moving files from one environment to the other.
Copying CAL files from LMF to a Disk
Follow the procedures in Table 5-1 to copy the CAL files from a CDMA
LMF computer to a 3.5 diskette.
Table 5-1: Copying CAL Files to a Diskette
Step
Action
With Windows running on the CDMA LMF computer, insert a disk into Drive A:.
Launch the Windows Explorer Program from your Programs menu list.
Select the applicable wlmf/cdma/bts–# folder.
Drag the bts–#.cal file to Drive A.
Repeat Steps 3 and 4, as required, for other bts–# folders.
Copying CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC
Follow the procedures in Table 5-2 to copy CAL files from a diskette to
the CBSC.
Table 5-2: Copying CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC
Step
Action
Log in to the CBSC on the OMC–R Unix workstation using your account name and password.
Place your diskette containing calibration file(s) in the workstation diskette drive.
Type in eject –q and press the Enter key.
Type in mount and press the Enter key.
NOTE
S Check to see that the message “floppy/no_name” is displayed on the last line.
S If the eject command was previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with a number.
Use the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed.
Type in cd /floppy/no_name and press the Enter key.
Type in ls –lia and press the Enter key. Verify that the bts–#.cal file is on the diskette.
Type in cd and press the Enter key.
Type in pwd and press the Enter key. Verify you are in your home directory (/home/).
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
5-1
Back Up Calibration Data Files – continued
Table 5-2: Copying CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC
Step
Action
With Solaris versions of Unix, create a Unix–formatted version of the bts–#.cal file in your home
directory by entering the following command:
dos2unix /floppy/no_name/bts–#.cal bts–#.cal and press the Enter key (where # is BTS
number).
NOTE
Other versions of Unix do not support the dos2unix command. In these cases, use the Unix cp
(copy) command. The copied files will contain DOS line feed characters which must be edited out
with a Unix text editor.
10
Type in ls –l *.cal and press the Enter key. Verify the cal files have been copied.
11
Type in eject and press the Enter key.
12
Remove the diskette from the workstation.
5-2
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
68P09253A60
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Prepare to Leave the Site
Removing External Test
Equipment
Perform the procedure in Table 5-3 to disconnect the test equipment and
configure the BTS for active service.
Table 5-3: Remove External Test Equipment
Step
Action
Disconnect all external test equipment from all TX and RX connectors at the rear of the frame.
Reconnect and visually inspect all TX and RX antenna feed lines at the frame RF interface panel.
! CAUTION
Verify that all sector antenna feed lines are connected to the correct ports on the frame. Crossed
antenna cables will cause system degradation of call processing.
Reset All Devices and Initialize
Site Remotely
Generally, devices in the BTS should not be left with data and code
loaded from the CDMA LMF. The configuration data and code loads
used for normal operation could be different from those stored in the
CDMA LMF files. By resetting all devices, the required data and code
can be loaded from the CBSC when spans are again active.
To reset all devices and have the OMCR/CBSC bring up the site
remotely, perform the procedure in Table 5-4.
Table 5-4: Reset BTS Devices and Remote Site Initialization
Step
Action
Terminate the CDMA LMF session by following the procedures in Table 5-6.
NOTE
In the following step, performing Table 2-6 DC voltage measurements other than those using the MAP
VOLT and AMP indicators is not necessary if DC power system components have not been replaced
during the optimization and/or ATP process.
Cycle BTS power off, as specified in Table 2-9, and on, as specified in Table 2-5, Table 2-6, and step 1
of Table 2-7, respectively.
Reconnect spans by following the procedure in Table 5-7.
Notify the OMCR/CBSC to take control of the site and download code and data to the BTS.
Verify the CBSC can communicate with the GLIs.
Bringing Modules into Service
with the CDMA LMF
IMPORTANT
08/01/2001
Whenever possible, have the CBSC/MM bring up the site
and enable all devices at the BTS.
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
5-3
Prepare to Leave the Site
– continued
If there is a reason code and/or data should or could not be loaded
remotely from the CBSC, follow the steps outlined in Table 5-5 as
required to bring BTS processor modules from OOS to INS state.
Table 5-5: Bring Modules into Service
Step
Action
In the CDMA LMF GUI environment, select the device(s) you wish to enable.
NOTE
S The MGLI, CSM, and applicable BDC must be INS before an MCC can be enabled to INS.
S Processors which must be enabled and the order of enabling are as follows:
–
–
–
–
MGLI
GLI
CSMs
MCCs
Click on Device from the menu bar.
Click on Enable from the Device menu. A status report window is displayed.
NOTE
If a BBX is selected, a transceiver parameters window is displayed to collect keying information. Do
not enable the BBX.
Click Cancel to close the transceiver parameters window, if applicable.
Click OK to close the status report window.
The selected devices that successfully change to INS change color to green.
Terminating LMF
Session/Removing Terminal
Perform the procedure in Table 5-6 as required to terminate the LMF
GUI session and remove the CDMA LMF computer.
Table 5-6: Remove LMF
Step
Action
! CAUTION
Do not power down the CDMA LMF terminal without performing the procedure below.
Corrupted/lost data files may result.
Log out of all BTS sessions and exit CDMA LMF by clicking on the File selection in the menu bar
and selecting Exit from the File menu list.
Click Yes in the Confirm Logout pop–up message which appears.
In the Windows Task Bar, click Start and select Shutdown.
Click Yes when the Shut Down Windows message appears
Wait for the system to shut down and the screen to go blank.
. . . continued on next page
5-4
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued
Table 5-6: Remove LMF
Step
Action
Disconnect the CDMA LMF terminal Ethernet port from the BTS frame.
Disconnect the CDMA LMF terminal serial port, the RS–232–to–GPIB interface box, and the
GPIB cables as required for equipment transport.
Connecting BTS T1/E1 Spans
Before leaving the site, connect any T1 or E1 span connectors removed
previously to allow the LMF to control the BTS. Refer to Table 5-7 and
Figure 3-7.
Table 5-7: Connect T1 or E1 Spans
Step
Action
Re–connect any disconnected span connectors to the Span I/O A and B boards.
If equipped, ensure the CSU is powered on.
Verify span status, ensuring the OMC–R/CBSC can communicate with the BTS.
Before Leaving the site
Be sure all requirements listed in Table 5-8 are completed before leaving
the site.
Table 5-8: Check Before Leaving the Site
Step
Action
All battery circuit breakers (for occupied shelves) are ON (pushed in).
Both heat exchanger circuit breakers on the DC PDA are set to ON (pushed in), and the heat
exchanger blowers are running.
The External Blower Assembly (EBA) power cable is connected, and the EBA is running.
The MAP power switch is set to ON, and the POWER (green) LED is lighted.
The BATT TEST switch on the MAP is set to OFF, and the BATT. TEST (amber) LED is not lighted.
No alarm conditions are being reported to the CBSC with all frame doors closed.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
5-5
Prepare to Leave the Site
– continued
Notes
5-6
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Chapter 6: Basic Troubleshooting
Table of Contents
08/01/2001
Basic Troubleshooting Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
6-1
Troubleshooting: Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Log into Cell-Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Communicate with Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Communicate with Communications Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
6-2
6-5
6-6
Troubleshooting: Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Download DATA to Any Device (Card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot ENABLE Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPA Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7
6-7
6-8
6-9
Troubleshooting: Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bay Level Offset Calibration Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Audit Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10
6-10
6-11
Basic Troubleshooting – RF Path Fault Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If Every Test Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify BLO Checkbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If Faults Are Isolated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault Isolation Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flowchart Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Power Output Fault Isolation Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-13
6-13
6-13
6-13
6-14
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Perform Txmask Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot Time Offset Measurement . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Perform Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement .
Cannot Perform Carrier Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15
6-15
6-15
6-16
6-16
Troubleshooting: Receive ATP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi–FER Test Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-17
6-17
Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problem Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intermittent 19.6608 MHz Reference Clock / GPS Receiver Operation
No GPS Reference Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checksum Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS Bad RX Message Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSM Reference Source Configuration Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-18
6-18
6-18
6-18
6-18
6-18
6-19
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table of Contents
– continued
Takes Too Long for CSM to Come INS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-19
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Control Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX and RX Signal Routing Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-20
6-20
6-20
6-21
6-21
6-24
6-25
RFDS – Fault Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All tests fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All RX and TX paths fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All tests fail on a single antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-26
6-26
6-26
6-26
6-26
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Status Combinations for All Modules
(except GLI2, CSM, BBX2, MCC24, MCC8E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSM LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GLI2 LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GLI2 Pushbuttons and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BBX2 LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCC24 LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPA Shelf LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-28
6-28
6-28
6-28
6-29
6-31
6-32
6-33
6-33
6-34
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Span Problems (No Control Link) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set BTS Site Span Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-35
6-35
6-36
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Basic Troubleshooting Overview
Overview
The information in this chapter addresses some of the scenarios likely to
be encountered by Customer Field Engineering (CFE) team members.
This troubleshooting guide was created as an interim reference document
for use in the field. It provides “what to do if” basic troubleshooting
suggestions when the BTS equipment does not perform per the
procedure documented in the manual.
Comments are consolidated from inputs provided by CFEs in the field
and information gained from experience in Motorola labs and
classrooms.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-1
Troubleshooting: Installation
Cannot Log into Cell-Site
Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedures
n Step
Action
If MGLI2 LED is solid RED, it implies a hardware failure. Reset MGLI2 by
re-seating it. If this persists, install RGLI2 card in MGLI2 slot and retry. A Red
LED may also indicate no termination on an external LAN connector (power entry
compartment at rear of frame).
Verify that the span line is disconnected at the Span I/O card. If the span is still
connected, verify the CBSC has disabled the BTS.
Try ‘ping’ing the MGLI2.
Verify the LMF is connected to the primary LAN (LAN A) at the LAN shelf
below the SCCP cage. If LAN A is not the active LAN, force a LAN switch to
LAN A by following the procedure in Table 6-2.
Verify the LMF was configured properly.
If a Xircom parallel BNC LAN interface is being used, verify the BTS-LMF cable
is RG-58 (flexible black cable of less than 2.5 feet length).
Verify the external LAN connectors are properly terminated (power entry
compartment at rear of frame).
Verify a T-adapter is not used on LMF computer side connector when connected
to the primary LAN at the LAN shelf.
Try connecting to the Ethernet Out port in the power entry compartment (rear of
frame). Use a TRB–to–BNC (triax–to–coax) adapter at the LAN connector for this
connection.
10
Re-boot the CDMA LMF and retry.
11
Re-seat the MGLI2 and retry.
12
Verify GLI2 IP addresses are configured properly by following the procedure in
Table 6-3.
Table 6-2: Force Ethernet LAN A to Active State as Primary LAN
n Step
Action
If LAN A is not the active LAN, make certain all external LAN connectors are
terminated with 50Ω loads or cabled to another frame.
If it has not already been done, connect the LMF computer to the stand–alone or
starter frame, as applicable (Table 3-6).
If it has not already been done, start a GUI LMF session and log into the BTS on
the active LAN (Table 3-7).
. . . continued on next page
6-2
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Troubleshooting: Installation – continued
Table 6-2: Force Ethernet LAN A to Active State as Primary LAN
n Step
Remove the 50Ω termination from the LAN B IN connector in the power entry
compartment at the rear of the stand–alone or starter frame. The CDMA LMF
session will become inactive.
Disconnect the LMF computer from the LAN shelf LAN B connector and connect
it to the LAN A connector.
If the LAN was successfully forced to an active state (the cards in any cage can be
selected and statused), proceed to step 13.
With the 50Ω termination still removed from the LAN B IN connector, remove
the 50Ω termination from LAN B OUT connector. If more than one frame is
connected to the LAN, remove the termination from the last frame in the chain.
If the LAN was successfully forced to an active state (the cards in any cage can be
selected and statused), proceed to step 13.
With the 50Ω terminations still removed from LAN B, unseat each GLI card in
each frame connected to the LAN, until all are disconnected from the shelf
backplanes.
10
Reseat each GLI card until all are reconnected.
11
Allow the GLIs to power up, and attempt to select and status cards in the CCP
shelves. If LAN A is active, proceed to step 13.
12
If LAN A is still not active, troubleshoot or continue troubleshooting following
the procedures in Table 6-1.
13
08/01/2001
Action
Replace the 50Ω terminations removed from the LAN B IN and OUT connectors.
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
6-3
Troubleshooting: Installation – continued
Table 6-3: GLI IP Address Setting
n Step
Action
If it has not previously been done, establish an MMI communication session with
the GLI card as described in Table 3-11.
Enter the following command to display the IP address and subnet mask settings
for the card:
config lg0 current
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
GLI2>config lg0 current
lg0: IP address is set to
DEFAULT (configured based on card location)
lg0: netmask is set to
DEFAULT (255.255.255.128)
If the IP address setting response shows an IP address rather than “Default
(configured based on card location),” enter the following:
config lg0 ip default
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
GLI2>config lg0 ip default
_param_config_lg0_ip(): param_delete(): 0x00050001
lg0: ip address set to DEFAULT
If the GLI subnet mask setting does not display as “DEFAULT
(255.255.255.128),” set it to default by entering the following command:
config lg0 netmask default
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
GLI2>config lg0 netmask default
_param_config_lg0_netmask(): param_delete(): 0x00050001
lg0: netmask set to DEFAULT
. . . continued on next page
6-4
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Troubleshooting: Installation – continued
Table 6-3: GLI IP Address Setting
n Step
Action
Set the GLI route default to default by entering the following command:
config route default default
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
GLI2>config route default default
_esh_config_route_default(): param_delete(): 0x00050001
route: default gateway set to DEFAULT
NOTE
Changes to the settings will not take effect unless the GLI is reset.
When changes are completed, close the MMI session, and reset the GLI card.
Once the GLI is reset, re–establish MMI communication with it and issue the
following command to confirm its IP address and subnet mask settings:
config lg0 current
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
GLI2>config lg0 current
lg0: IP address is set to
DEFAULT (configured based on card location)
lg0: netmask is set to
DEFAULT (255.255.255.128)
Repeat steps 1 through 7 for all remaining GLI2s, including those in any
additional, inter–connected frames.
Cannot Communicate with
Power Meter
Table 6-4: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure
n Step
08/01/2001
Action
Verify Power Meter is connected to LMF with GPIB adapter.
Verify cable setup as specified in Chapter 3.
Verify the GPIB address of the Power Meter is set to 13. Refer to Test Equipment
setup section of Chapter 3 for details.
. . . continued on next page
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
6-5
Troubleshooting: Installation – continued
Table 6-4: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure
n Step
Action
Verify that Com1 port is not used by another application.
Verify that the communications analyzer is in Talk&Listen mode, not Control
mode.
Cannot Communicate with
Communications Analyzer
Table 6-5: Troubleshooting a Communications Analyzer Communication Failure
n Step
6-6
Action
Verify analyzer is connected to LMF with GPIB adapter.
Verify cable setup.
Verify the GPIB address is set to 18.
Verify the GPIB adapter DIP switch settings are correct. Refer to Test Equipment
setup section for details.
Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only 2 green
LEDs must be ‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’,
then power-cycle the GPIB Box and retry.
If a Hyperterm window is open for MMI, close it.
Verify the LMF GPIB address is set to 18.
Verify the analyzer is in Talk&Listen mode, not Control mode.
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Troubleshooting: Download
Table 6-6: Troubleshooting Code Download Failure
n Step
Action
Verify T1 or E1 span is disconnected from the BTS at CSU.
Verify LMF can communicate with the BTS device using the Status function.
Communication to MGLI2 must first be established before trying to talk to any
other BTS device. MGLI2 must be INS_ACT state (green).
Verify the card is physically present in the cage and powered-up.
If card LED is solid RED, it implies hardware failure. Reset card by re-seating it.
If this persists, replace card from another slot & retry.
NOTE
The card can only be replaced by a card of the same type.
Re-seat card and try again.
If BBX2 reports a failure message and is OOS_RAM, the code load was OK.
Status it to verify the load.
If the download portion completes and the reset portion fails, reset the device by
clicking on the device and selecting DEVICE > RESET.
Cannot Download DATA to Any
Device (Card)
Table 6-7: Troubleshooting Data Download Failure
n Step
08/01/2001
Action
Re-seat card and repeat code and data load procedure.
Verify the ROM and RAM code loads are of the same release by statusing the
card. Refer to Chapter 3, “Download the BTS” for more information.
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
6-7
Troubleshooting: Download – continued
Cannot ENABLE Device
Before a device can be enabled (placed in-service), it must be in the
OOS_RAM state (yellow on the LMF) with data downloaded to the
device. The color of the device on the LMF changes to green, once it is
enabled.
The three states that devices can be displayed:
S Enabled (green, INS)
S Disabled (yellow, OOS_RAM)
S Reset (blue, OOS_ROM)
Table 6-8: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) Failure
n Step
Action
Re-seat card and repeat code and data load procedure.
If CSM cannot be enabled, verify the CDF file has correct latitude and longitude
data for cell site location and GPS sync.
Ensure primary CSM is in INS_ACT state.
NOTE
MCCs will not go INS without the CSM being INS.
6-8
Verify 19.6608 MHz CSM clock is present; MCCs will not go INS without it.
BBXs should not be enabled for ATP tests.
If MCCs give “invalid or no system time,” verify the CSM is enabled.
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Troubleshooting: Download – continued
LPA Errors
Table 6-9: LPA Errors
n Step
Action
If LPAs continue to give alarms, even after cycling power at the circuit breakers,
then connect an MMI cable to the LPA and set up a HyperTerminal connection.
Enter ALARMS in the Hyperterminal window. The resulting hyperTerminal
display may provide an indication of the problem. (Call Field Support for further
assistance.)
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
6-9
Troubleshooting: Calibration
Bay Level Offset Calibration
Failure
Table 6-10: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration Failure
n Step
Verify the Power Meter is configured correctly (see the test equipment setup
section) and connection is made to the proper TX port.
Verify the parameters in the bts–#.cdf file are set correctly for the following
bands:
For 1900 MHz:
Bandclass=1; Freq_Band=16
For 800 MHz:
Bandclass=0; Freq_Band=8
Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Reset the
LPA by pulling the circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.
Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors
from the power sensor.
Verify GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only 2 green
LEDs must be ‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’,
power-cycle (turn power off and on) the GPIB Box and retry.
Verify the power sensor is functioning properly by checking it with the 1–mW (0
dBm) Power Ref signal.
If communication between the LMF and Power Meter is working, the Meter
display will show “RES :’’
Verify the combiner frequency is the same as the test freq/chan.
6-10
Action
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Troubleshooting: Calibration – continued
Calibration Audit Failure
Table 6-11: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit Failure
n Step
Action
Verify Power Meter is configured correctly (refer to the test equipment setup
section).
Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors
from the power sensor.
Verify that no LPA is in alarm state (rapidly flashing red LED). Reset the LPA by
pulling the circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.
Verify the power sensor is functioning properly by checking it with the 1 mW (0
dBm) Power Ref signal.
After calibration, the BLO data must be re-loaded to the BBXs before auditing.
Click on the BBX(s) and select Download Code > Download Data>Enable.
Re-try the audit.
Verify GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only 2 green
LEDs must be ‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’,
power-cycle (turn power off and on) the GPIB Box and retry.
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY 6-11
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Basic Troubleshooting – RF Path Fault Isolation
Overview
The optimization (RF path characterization or calibration) and
post-calibration (audit) procedures measure and limit-check the BTS
reported transmit and receive levels of the path from each BBX2 to the
back of the frame. When a fault is detected, it is specific to a receive or
transmit path. The troubleshooting process in this section determines the
most probable cause of the fault.
As the calibration and audit tests are performed, results are displayed in
the LMF test status report window. When faults are encountered, the test
procedure in progress continues running and displaying any further
faults. If it appears that there are major faults, the test can be aborted.
The test results can be saved to a bts–<#>.rpt file in the
wlmf\cdma\bts–<#> folder. To do this, close the test status report
window using the Save Results button.
IMPORTANT
Closing the test status report window with the Dismiss
button will delete the test results without saving them.
If a test is re–run or a new calibration, audit, or test is run and the results
are saved, the previous test results in the bts–<#>.rpt file are
overwritten. To prevent losing previous test results in the bts–<#>.rpt
file, refer to the procedure in Table 4-10 before performing further
testing with the LMF.
If there are major faults, recheck the test equipment attachments for
errors. If none are found, close the test status report window using the
Save Results button, and save the contents of the resulting
bts–<#>.rpt file as described in Table 4-10. Also, note other specifics
about the failure, and proceed with the fault isolation procedure.
If Every Test Fails
Check the calibration equipment for proper operation by manually
setting the signal generator output attenuator to the lowest output power
setting. Connect the output port to the spectrum analyzer RF input port.
Set the signal generator output attenuator to –90 dBm, and switch on the
RF output. Verify that the spectrum analyzer can receive the signal,
indicate the correct signal strength (accounting for the cable insertion
loss), and indicate the approximate frequency.
6-12
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Basic Troubleshooting – RF Path Fault Isolation – continued
Verify BLO Checkbox
When performing a calibration with the TX Calibration... or All
Cal/Audit... functions, the Verify BLO checkbox should normally be
checked. When a calibration fails, determine if any items such as
directional couplers or combiners have been added to the TX path. If
additional items have been installed in the path, try re–running the
calibration with Verify BLO unchecked. If calibration still does not
pass, refer to the following paragraphs and use the TX output fault
isolation flowchart to identify the most probable cause of the failure.
If Faults Are Isolated
If the fault reports are isolated between successful path checks, the root
cause of the faults most likely lies with one or more of the Field
Replaceable Unit (FRU) modules. If more than one failure was reported,
look for a common denominator in the data. For example, if any TX test
fails on one sector only, the BBX2 assigned to that sector (Table 1-5) is a
likely cause. Also, look at the severity of the failure. If the path loss is
just marginally out of the relaxed specification limit during the
post-calibration TX audit, suspect excessive cable loss. If limits are
missed by a wide margin, suspect mis–wired cables or total device
failure. Use the TX output fault isolation flowchart in Figure 6-1 to
identify the strongest possible cause for a failed TX test.
Fault Isolation Flowchart
The flowchart covers the transmit path. Transmit paths usually fail the
lower test limit, indicating excessive loss in some component in the BTS
site or mis–wiring. A failure of an upper limit usually indicates a
problem with the test setup or external equipment. Before replacing a
suspected FRU, always repeat and verify the test results to rule out a
transient condition. If a BBX2 fails an upper limit in the post–calibration
audit procedure, re–calibrate and verify the out–of–tolerance condition
for that BBX2 and/or sector before replacement.
Flowchart Prerequisites
Before entering the fault isolation sequence outlined in the flowchart, be
sure the following have been completed:
S GLIs, MCCs, and BBXs have been downloaded with the correct ROM
code, RAM code, and data (Table 3-13, Table 3-14, and Table 3-15).
S MGLI, CSMs, and MCCs are enabled (Table 3-14, Table 3-17, and
Table 3-18, respectively)
S Be sure the LED on the correct CCD card is solid green.
S Be sure no alarms are being reported by opening an LMF alarm
window as outlined in Table 3-47.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-13
Basic Troubleshooting – RF Path Fault Isolation – continued
TX Power Output Fault
Isolation Flowchart
Figure 6-1: TX Output Fault Isolation Flowchart
Start
TX Power
Out of Limits
Did TX Output
fail the High or
Low limit?
High limit
failure.
Does
redundant BBX
have the same
problem on the
same sector?
No
Likely Cause:
Yes
Low limit
failure.
Does any other
sector have the
same problem?
Yes
Likely Cause:
External Power Measurement
Equipment and/or Set–up.
Also check:
Switch card
External Attenuators & Pads,
Check Site Documentation.
Likely Cause:
CIO card
Carrier trunking module
Also check:
CIO–trunking module cabling
TX filter/combiner cabling
TX DRDC/TRDC cabling
Likely Cause:
BBX card
Loose connections on
CIO–trunking module cabling,
TX filter/combiner cabling, or
TX DRDC/TRDC cabling
Also check:
CIO card
Carrier trunking module
Likely Cause:
Crossed TX cabling to include:
– CIO–trunking module,
– Trunking module–filter/combiner,
– Filter/combiner–DRDC/TRDC
Carrier LPAs
Also check:
Carrier trunking module
CIO card.
Likely Cause:
CIO card not fully seated
External Power Measurement
Equipment and/or Set–up
Crossed TX cabling to include:
– CIO–trunking module,
– Trunking module–filter/combiner,
– Filter/combiner–DRDC/TRDC
No
If equipped, does a
BBX on the same
carrier but for a
different sector
pass?
Yes, it passes.
No, next BBX on same carrier
fails on different sector.
If equipped, does a
BBX on a different
carrier but for the
same sector
pass?
Yes, it passes.
No, everything fails
6-14
BBX card
Attempt re–calibration
before replacement.
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP
Cannot Perform Txmask
Measurement
Table 6-12: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement Failure
n Step
Action
Verify that TX audit passes for the BBX2(s).
If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.
Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Re-set the
LPA by pulling the circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing it back in.
Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot
Time Offset Measurement
Table 6-13: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure
n Step
08/01/2001
Action
Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.
Verify PN offsets displayed on the analyzer is the same as the PN offset in the
CDF file.
Re–load MGLI2 data and repeat the test.
If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.
Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Reset the
LPA by pulling the circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.
If Rho value is unstable and varies considerably (e.g. .95,.92,.93), this may
indicate that the GPS is still phasing (i.e. trying to reach and maintain 0 freq.
error). Go to the freq. bar in the upper right corner of the Rho meter and select Hz.
Press  and enter 10, to obtain an average Rho value. This is an
indication the GPS has not stabilized before going INS and may need to be
re-initialized.
PRELIMINARY 6-15
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP – continued
Cannot Perform Code Domain
Power and Noise Floor
Measurement
Table 6-14: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement Failure
n Step
Action
Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.
Verify PN offset displayed on analyzer is same as PN offset being used in the
CDF file.
Disable and re-enable MCC (one or more MCCs based on extent of failure).
Cannot Perform Carrier
Measurement
Table 6-15: Troubleshooting Carrier Measurement Failure
n Step
Action
Perform the test manually, using the spread CDMA signal. Verify High Stability
10 MHz Rubidium Standard is warmed up (60 minutes) and properly connected to
test set-up.
6-16
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Troubleshooting: Receive ATP
Multi–FER Test Failure
Table 6-16: Troubleshooting Multi-FER Failure
n Step
Action
Verify test equipment set up is correct for a FER test.
Verify test equipment is locked to 19.6608 and even second clocks. The yellow
LED (REF UNLOCK) must be OFF.
Verify MCCs have been loaded with data and are INS–ACT.
Disable and re-enable the MCC (1 or more based on extent of failure).
Disable, re-load code and data, and re-enable MCC (one or more MCCs based on
extent of failure).
Verify antenna connections to frame are correct based on the directions messages.
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY6-17
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist
Problem Description
Many Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) board problems may be
resolved in the field before sending the boards to the factory for repair.
This section describes known CSM problems identified in field returns,
some of which are field-repairable. Check these problems before
returning suspect CSM boards.
Intermittent 19.6608 MHz
Reference Clock / GPS
Receiver Operation
If having any problems with CSM board kit numbers, SGLN1145 or
SGLN4132, check the suffix with the kit number. If the kit has version
“AB,” then replace with version ‘‘BC’’ or higher, and return model AB
to the repair center.
No GPS Reference Source
Check the CSM boards for proper hardware configuration.
RF–GPS (Local GPS) – CSM kit SGLN1145, which should be installed
in Slot l, has an on-board GPS receiver; while kit SGLN4132, in Slot 2,
does not have a GPS receiver.
Remote GPS (R–GPS) – Kit SGLN4132, which should be installed in
both Slot 1 and Slot 2, does not have a GPS receiver.
Any incorrectly configured board must be returned to the repair center.
Do not attempt to change hardware configuration in the field. Also,
verify the GPS antenna is not damaged and is installed per recommended
guidelines.
Checksum Failure
The CSM could have corrupted data in its firmware resulting in a
non-executable code. The problem is usually caused by either electrical
disturbance, or interruption of data during a download. Attempt another
download with no interruptions in the data transfer. Return CSM board
back to repair center if the attempt to reload fails.
GPS Bad RX Message Type
This is believed to be caused by a later version of CSM software (3.5 or
higher) being downloaded, via LMF, followed by an earlier version of
CSM software (3.4 or lower), being downloaded from the CBSC.
Download again with CSM software code 3.5 or higher. Return CSM
board back to repair center if attempt to reload fails.
6-18
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist – continued
CSM Reference Source
Configuration Error
This is caused by incorrect reference source configuration performed in
the field by software download. CSM kit SGLN1145 and SGLN4132
must have proper reference sources configured (as shown below) to
function correctly.
CSM Kit No.
SGLN1145
SGLN4132
Hardware Configuration
With GPS Receiver
Without GPS Receiver
CSM Slot No.
Reference Source Configuration
Primary = Local GPS
Backup = Either LFR or HSO
Primary = Remote GPS
Backup = Either LFR or HSO
Primary = Remote GPS
Backup = Either LFR or HSO
Primary = Mate GPS
Backup = Either LFR or HSO
Takes Too Long for CSM to
Come INS
This may be caused by a delay in GPS acquisition. Check the accuracy
flag status and/or current position. Refer to the CSM system time/GPS
and LFR/HSO verification section in Chapter 3. At least 1 satellite
should be visible and tracked for the “surveyed” mode and 4 satellites
should be visible and tracked for the “estimated” mode. Also, verify
correct base site position data used in “surveyed” mode.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-19
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting
Introduction
The SCCP backplane is a multi–layer board that interconnects all the
SCCP modules. The complexity of this board lends itself to possible
improper diagnoses when problems occur.
Connector Functionality
The following connector overview describes the major types of
backplane connectors along with the functionality of each. This will
allow the Cellular Field Engineer (CFE) to:
S Determine which connector(s) is associated with a specific problem
type.
S Allow the isolation of problems to a specific cable or connector.
Span Line Connector
The span line input is an 8 pin RJ–45 connector that provides a primary
and secondary (if used) span line interface to each GLI2 in the SCCP
shelf. The span line is used for MM/EMX switch control of the Master
GLI2 and also all the BBX2 traffic.
Power Input (Return A and B connectors)
Provides a 27 volt input for use by the power supply modules.
Power Supply Module Interface
Each power supply module has a series of three different connectors to
provide the needed inputs/outputs to the SCCP backplane. These include
a VCC/Ground input connector, a Harting style multiple pin interface,
and a +15V/Analog Ground output connector. The Transceiver Power
Module converts 27/48 Volts to a regulated +15, +6.5, +5.0 volts to be
used by the SCCP shelf cards.
GLI2 Connector
This connector consists of a Harting 4SU digital connector and a
6–conductor coaxial connector for RDM distribution. The connectors
provide inputs/outputs for the GLI2s in the SCCP backplane.
GLI2 Ethernet “A” and “B” Connections
These SMB connectors are located on the SCCP backplane and connect
to the GLI2 board. This interface provides all the control and data
communications over the Ethernet LAN between the master GLI2, the
other GLI2, and the LMF.
BBX2 Connector
Each BBX2 connector consists of a Harting 2SU/1SU digital connector
and two 6–conductor coaxial connectors. These connectors provide DC,
digital, and RF inputs/outputs for the BBX2s in the SCCP backplane.
6-20
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued
CIO Connectors
S RX RF antenna path signal inputs are routed through RX paths of the
DRDCs or TRDCs at the RF interface panel (rear of frame), and
through coaxial cables to the two MPC modules. The three “A” (main)
signals go to one MPC; the three “B” (diversity) to the other. The
MPC outputs the low–noise–amplified signals via the SCCP
backplane to the CIO where the signals are split and sent to the
appropriate BBX2.
S A digital bus then routes the baseband signal through the BBX2, to
the backplane, and then on to the MCC24/MCC8E slots.
S Digital TX antenna path signals originate at the MCC24/MCC8Es.
Each output is routed from the MCC24/MCC8E slot through the
backplane to the appropriate BBX2.
S TX RF path signal originates from the BBX2, travels through the
backplane to the CIO, through the CIO, and then through
multi-conductor coaxial cabling to the trunking module and LPAs in
the LPA shelf.
SCCP Backplane
Troubleshooting Procedure
The following tables provide standard procedures for troubleshooting
problems that appear to be related to a defective SCCP backplane. The
tables are broken down into possible problems and steps which should
be taken in an attempt to find the root cause.
IMPORTANT
It is important to note that all steps be followed before
replacing ANY SCCP backplane.
Digital Control Problems
No GLI2 Control via LMF (all GLI2s)
Table 6-17: No GLI2 Control via LMF (all GLI2s)
Step
08/01/2001
Action
Check the Ethernet LAN for proper connection, damage,
shorts, or opens.
Be sure the LAN IN and OUT connectors in the power entry
compartment are properly terminated.
Be sure the proper IP address is entered in the Network Login
tab of the LMF login screen.
Verify SCCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-21
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued
Table 6-17: No GLI2 Control via LMF (all GLI2s)
Step
Action
Visually check the master GLI2 connectors (both module and
backplane) for damage.
Replace the master GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
No GLI2 Control through Span Line Connection (All GLI2s)
Table 6-18: No GLI2 Control through Span Line Connection (Both
GLI2s)
Step
Action
Verify SCCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.
Verify that the BTS and GLI2s are correctly configured in the
OMCR/CBSC data base.
Verify the span configurations set in the GLI2s match those in
the OMC–R/CBSC database (refer to Table 6-29).
Visually check the master GLI2 connectors (both module and
backplane) for damage.
Replace the master GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
Check the span line inputs from the top of the frame to the
master GLI2 for proper connection and damage.
Table 6-19: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over Co–located
GLI2
Step
Action
Verify that the BTS and GLI2s are correctly configured in the
OMCR CBSC data base.
Check the ethernet for proper connection, damage, shorts, or
opens.
Visually check all GLI2 connectors (both module and
backplane) for damage.
Replace the remaining GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
No AMR Control (MGLI2 good)
Table 6-20: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over AMR
6-22
Step
Action
Visually check the master GLI2 connectors (both module and
backplane) for damage.
Replace the master GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
Replace the AMR with a known good AMR.
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued
No BBX2 Control in the Shelf
Table 6-21: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over Co–located
BBX2s
Step
Action
Visually check all GLI2 connectors (both module and
backplane) for damage.
Replace the remaining GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
Visually check BBX2 connectors (both module and
backplane) for damage.
Replace the BBX2 with a known good BBX2.
No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic
Table 6-22: BBX2 Control Good – No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic
Step
Action
Visually check all GLI2 connectors (both module and
backplane) for damage.
Replace the remaining GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
Visually check all span line distribution (both connectors and
cables) for damage.
If the problem seems to be limited to one BBX2, replace the
BBX2 with a known good BBX2.
No (or Missing) MCC24/MCC8E Channel Elements
Table 6-23: No MCC24/MCC8E Channel Elements
Step
08/01/2001
Action
Verify CEs on a co–located MCC24/MCC8E (MccType=2)
If the problem seems to be limited to 1 MCC24/MCC8E,
replace the MCC24/MCC8E with a known good
MCC24/MCC8E.
– Check connectors (both module and backplane) for
damage.
If no CEs on any MCC24/MCC8E:
– Verify clock reference to CIO.
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-23
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued
DC Power Problems
WARNING
Potentially lethal voltage and current levels are routed to
the BTS equipment. This test must be carried out with a
second person present, acting in a safety role. Remove all
rings, jewelry, and wrist watches prior to beginning this
test.
No DC Input Voltage to SCCP Shelf Power Supply Modules
Table 6-24: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module
Step
Action
Verify DC power is applied to the frame. Determine if any
circuit breakers are tripped.
* IMPORTANT
If a breaker has tripped, remove all modules from the SCCP
shelf and attempt to reset it.
– If breaker trips again, there is probably a cable or breaker
problem within the frame or DC PDA.
– If breaker does not trip, there is probably a defective
module or sub–assembly within the shelf. Perform the
tests in Table 2-3 to attempt to isolate the module.
Verify that the PS1 and PS2 circuit breakers on the DC PDA
are functional.
Remove the frame rear access panel (Figure 2-1), and use a
voltmeter to determine if the input voltage is being routed to
the SCCP backplane. Measure the DC voltage level between:
S The PWR_IN_A and PWR_RTN_A contacts on the
extreme right side at the rear of the backplane
S The PWR_IN_B and PWR_RTN_B contacts on the
extreme right side at the rear of the backplane
– If the voltage is not present, there is probably a cable or
circuit breaker problem within the frame or DC PDA.
6-24
If everything appears to be correct, visually inspect the PS1
and PS2 power supply module connectors.
Replace the power supply modules with a known good
module.
If steps 1 through 4 fail to indicate a problem, an SCCP
backplane failure has occurred (possibly an open trace).
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued
No DC Voltage (+5, +6.5, or +15 Volts) to a Specific GLI2,
BBX2, or Switchmodule
Table 6-25: No DC Input Voltage to any SCCP Shelf Module
Step
Action
Verify steps outlined in Table 6-24 have been performed.
Inspect the defective module connectors (both module and
backplane) for damage.
Replace suspect module with known good module.
TX and RX Signal Routing
Problems
Table 6-26: TX and RX Signal Routing Problems
Step
Action
Inspect all Harting Cable connectors and backplane
connectors for damage in all the affected board slots.
Perform steps outlined in the RF path troubleshooting
flowchart in Figure 6-1.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-25
RFDS – Fault Isolation
Introduction
The RFDS is used to perform Pre–Calibration Verification and
Post-Calibration Audits which limit-check the RFDS-generate and
reported receive levels of every path from the RFDS through the
directional coupler coupled paths. In the event of test failure, refer to the
following tables.
All tests fail
Table 6-27: RFDS Fault Isolation – All tests fail
Step
Action
Check the calibration equipment for proper operation by manually setting the signal generator output
attenuator to the lowest output power setting and connecting the output port to the spectrum analyzer
rf input port.
Set the signal generator output attenuator to –90 dBm, and switch on the rf output. Verify that the
spectrum analyzer can receive the signal, indicate the correct signal strength, (accounting for the cable
insertion loss), and the approximate frequency.
Visually inspect RF cabling. Make sure each directional coupler forward and reflected port connects to
the RFDS antenna select unit on the RFDS.
Check the wiring against the site documentation wiring diagram or the BTS Site Installation manual.
Verify RGLI and TSU have been downloaded.
Check to see that all RFDS boards show green on the front panel indicators. Visually check for
external damage.
If any boards that do not show green replace the RFDS with a known–good unit. Re–test after
replacement.
All RX and TX paths fail
If every receive or transmit path fails, the problem most likely lies with
the rf converter board or the transceiver board. Replace the RFDS with a
known–good unit and retest.
All tests fail on a single
antenna
If all path failures are on one antenna port, forward and/or reflected,
make the following checks.
Table 6-28: RFDS Fault Isolation – All tests fail on single antenna path
Step
Action
Visually inspect the site interface cabinet internal cabling to the suspect directional coupler antenna
port.
Verify the forward and reflected ports connect to the correct RFDS antenna select unit positions on the
RFDS backplane. Refer to the installation manual for details.
. . . continued on next page
6-26
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
RFDS – Fault Isolation – continued
Table 6-28: RFDS Fault Isolation – All tests fail on single antenna path
Step
Action
Replace the RFDS with a known–good unit.
Replace the RF cables between the affected directional coupler and RFDS.
NOTE
Externally route the cable to bypass suspect segment.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-27
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
Module Status Indicators
Each of the non-passive plug-in modules has a bi-color (green & red)
LED status indicator located on the module front panel. The indicator is
labeled PWR/ALM. If both colors are turned on, the indicator is yellow.
Each plug-in module, except for the fan module, has its own alarm
(fault) detection circuitry that controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.
The fan TACH signal of each fan module is monitored by the AMR.
Based on the status of this signal the AMR controls the state of the
PWR/ALM LED on the fan module.
LED Status Combinations for
All Modules (except GLI2, CSM,
BBX2, MCC24, MCC8E)
PWR/ALM LED
The following list describes the states of the module status indicator.
S Solid GREEN – module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.
S Solid RED – module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due to
electrical hardware failure.
Note that a fault (alarm) indication may or may not be due to a complete
module failure and normal service may or may not be reduced or
interrupted.
DC/DC Converter LED Status
Combinations
The PWR CNVTR has its own alarm (fault) detection circuitry that
controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.
PWR/ALM LED
The following list describes the states of the bi-color LED.
S Solid GREEN – module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.
S Solid RED – module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due to
electrical hardware problem.
6-28
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
CSM LED Status Combinations
PWR/ALM LED
The CSMs include on-board alarm detection. Hardware and
software/firmware alarms are indicated via the front panel indicators.
After the memory tests, the CSM loads OOS–RAM code from the Flash
EPROM, if available. If not available, the OOS–ROM code is loaded
from the Flash EPROM.
S Solid GREEN – module is INS_ACT or INS_STBY no alarm.
S Solid RED – Initial power up or module is operating in a fault (alarm)
condition.
S Slowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarm.
S Long RED/Short GREEN – OOS_ROM alarm.
S Rapidly Flashing GREEN – OOS_RAM no alarm or
INS_ACT in DUMB mode.
Short RED/Short GREEN – OOS_RAM alarm.
Long GREEN/Short RED – INS_ACT or INS_STBY alarm.
Off – no DC power or on-board fuse is open.
Solid YELLOW – After a reset, the CSMs begin to boot. During
SRAM test and Flash EPROM code check, the LED is yellow. (If
SRAM or Flash EPROM fail, the LED changes to a solid RED and
the CSM attempts to reboot.)
Figure 6-2: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor Ports
SYNC
MONITOR
PWR/ALM
Indicator
FREQ
MONITOR
FW00303
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-29
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
FREQ Monitor Connector
A test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allows
monitoring of the 19.6608 MHz clock generated by the CSM. When
both CSM 1 and CSM 2 are in an in-service (INS) condition, the CSM 2
clock signal frequency is the same as that output by CSM 1.
The clock is a sine wave signal with a minimum amplitude of +2 dBm
(800 mVpp) into a 50 Ω load connected to this port.
SYNC Monitor Connector
A test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allows
monitoring of the “Even Second Tick” reference signal generated by the
CSMs.
At this port, the reference signal is a TTL active high signal with a pulse
width of 153 nanoseconds.
MMI Connector – Only accessible behind front panel. The RS–232
MMI port connector is intended to be used primarily in the development
or factory environment, but may be used in the field for
debug/maintenance purposes.
6-30
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
GLI2 LED Status Combinations
The GLI2 module has indicators, controls and connectors as described
below and shown in Figure 6-3.
The indicators and controls consist of:
S Four LEDs
S One pushbutton
ACTIVE LED
Solid GREEN – GLI2 is active. This means that the GLI2 has shelf
control and is providing control of the digital interfaces.
Off – GLI2 is not active (i.e., Standby). The mate GLI2 should be
active.
MASTER LED
S Solid GREEN – GLI2 is Master (sometimes referred to as MGLI2).
S Off – GLI2 is non-master (i.e., Slave).
ALARM LED
S Solid RED – GLI2 is in a fault condition or in reset.
S While in reset transition, STATUS LED is OFF while GLI2 is
performing ROM boot (about 12 seconds for normal boot).
S While in reset transition, STATUS LED is ON while GLI2 is
performing RAM boot (about 4 seconds for normal boot).
S Off – No Alarm.
STATUS LED
S Flashing GREEN– GLI2 is in service (INS), in a stable operating
condition.
S On – GLI2 is in OOS RAM state operating downloaded code.
S Off – GLI2 is in OOS ROM state operating boot code.
SPANS LED
S Solid GREEN – Span line is connected and operating.
S Solid RED – Span line is disconnected or a fault condition exists.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-31
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
GLI2 Pushbuttons and
Connectors
RESET Pushbutton – Depressing the RESET pushbutton causes a
partial reset of the CPU and a reset of all board devices. GLI2 will be
placed in the OOS_ROM state
MMI Connector – The RS–232MMI port connector is intended to be
used primarily in the development or factory environment but may be
used in the field for debug/maintenance purposes.
Figure 6-3: GLI2 Front Panel Operating Indicators
LED
ALARM LED
ALARM
SPANS LED
SPANS
RESET
RESET
PUSHBUTTON
STATUS
STATUS LED
ACTIVE
ACTIVE LED
STATUS
OFF - operating normally
ON - briefly during powerĆup when the Alarm LED turns OFF.
SLOW GREEN - when the GLI2 is INS (inĆservice)
RESET
All functions on the GLI2 are reset when pressing and releasing
the switch.
ALARM
OFF - operating normally
ON - briefly during powerĆup when the Alarm LED turns OFF.
SLOW GREEN - when the GLI2 is INS (inĆservice)
SPANS
OFF - card is powered down, in initialization, or in standby
GREEN - operating normally
YELLOW - one or more of the equipped initialized spans is receiving
a remote alarm indication signal from the far end
RED - one or more of the equipped initialized spans is in an alarm
state
MASTER
The pair of GLI2 cards include a redundant status. The card in the
top shelf is designated by hardware as the active card; the card in
the bottom shelf is in the standby mode.
ON - operating normally in active card
OFF - operating normally in standby card
MMI PORT
CONNECTOR
An RSĆ232, serial, asynchronous communications link for use as
an MMI port. This port supports 300 baud, up to a maximum of
115,200 baud communications.
ACTIVE
Shows the operating status of the redundant cards. The redundant
card toggles automatically if the active card is removed or fails
ON - active card operating normally
OFF - standby card operating normally
MMI
MMI PORT
CONNECTOR
MASTER
MASTER LED
OPERATING STATUS
FW00225
6-32
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
BBX2 LED Status
Combinations
PWR/ALM LED
The BBX module has its own alarm (fault) detection circuitry that
controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.
The following list describes the states of the bi-color LED:
Solid GREEN – INS_ACT no alarm
Solid RED Red – initializing or power-up alarm
Slowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarm
Long RED/Short GREEN – OOS_ROM alarm
Rapidly Flashing GREEN – OOS_RAM no alarm
Short RED/Short GREEN – OOS_RAM alarm
Long GREEN/Short RED – INS_ACT alarm
MCC24 LED Status
Combinations
The MCC24 module has LED indicators and connectors as described
below. See Figure 6-4. Note that the figure does not show the connectors
as they are concealed by the removable lens.
The LED indicators and their states are as follows:
PWR/ALM LED
S RED – fault on module
ACTIVE LED
Off – module is inactive, off-line, or not processing traffic.
Slowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarm.
Rapidly Flashing Green – OOS_RAM no alarm.
Solid GREEN – module is INS_ACT, on-line, processing traffic.
PWR/ALM and ACTIVE LEDs
S Solid RED – module is powered but is in reset or the BCP is inactive.
MMI Connectors
S The RS–232 MMI port connector (four-pin) is intended to be used
primarily in the development or factory environment but may be used
in the field for debugging purposes.
S The RJ–11 ethernet port connector (eight-pin) is intended to be used
primarily in the development environment but may be used in the field
for high data rate debugging purposes.
. . . continued on next page
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-33
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
Figure 6-4: MCC24 Front Panel LEDs and LED Indicators
PWR/ALM
PWR/ALM LED
LED
COLOR
OFF - operating normally
ON - briefly during powerĆup and during failure
ąconditions
An alarm is generated in the event of a failure
PWR/ALM
LENS
(REMOVABLE)
ACTIVE
RED
GREEN
RED
ACTIVE
ACTIVE LED
OPERATING STATUS
RAPIDLY BLINKING - Card is codeĆloaded but
ąnot enabled
SLOW BLINKING - Card is not codeĆloaded
ON - card is codeĆloaded and enabled
ą(INS_ACTIVE)
ON - fault condition
SLOW FLASHING (alternating with green) - CHI
ąbus inactive on powerĆup
FW00224
LPA Shelf LED Status
Combinations
LPA Module LED
Each LPA module is provided with a bi–color LED on the ETIB module
next to the MMI connector. Interpret this LED as follows:
S GREEN — LPA module is active and is reporting no alarms (Normal
condition).
S Flashing GREEN/RED — LPA module is active but is reporting an
low input power condition. If no BBX is keyed, this is normal and
does not constitute a failure.
S Flashing RED — LPA is in alarm.
6-34
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link
Span Problems (No Control
Link)
Table 6-29: Troubleshoot Control Link Failure
n Step
Action
Connect the CDMA LMF computer to the MMI port on the applicable MGLI2/GLI2 as shown in
Figure 6-5.
Start an MMI communication session with the applicable MGLI2/GLI2 by using the Windows
desktop shortcut icon (refer to Table 3-11).
Once the connection window opens, press the CDMA LMF computer Enter key until the GLI2>
prompt is obtained.
At the GLI2> prompt, enter:
config ni current  (equivalent of span view command)
The system will respond with a display similar to the following:
The frame format in flash
Equalization:
Span A – Default (0–131
Span B – Default (0–131
Span C – Default (0–131
Span D – Default (0–131
Span E – Default (0–131
Span F – Default (0–131
is set to use T1_2.
feet
feet
feet
feet
feet
feet
for
for
for
for
for
for
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
120
120
120
120
120
120
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
for
for
for
for
for
for
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
Linkspeed: Default (56K for T1 D4 AMI, 64K otherwise)
Currently, the link is running at the default rate
The actual rate is 0
NOTE
Defaults for span equalization are 0–131 feet for T1/J1 spans and 120 Ohm for E1.
Default linkspeed is 56K for T1 D4 AMI spans and 64K for all other types.
There is no need to change from defaults unless the OMC–R/CBSC span configuration requires it.
The span configurations loaded in the GLI must match those in the OMCR/CBSC database for the
BTS. If they do not, proceed to Table 6-30.
Repeat steps 1 through 5 for all remaining GLIs.
If the span settings are correct, verify the edlc parameters using the show command.
Any alarm conditions indicate that the span is not operating correctly.
S Try looping back the span line from the DSX panel back to the MM, and verify that the looped
signal is good.
S Listen for control tone on the appropriate timeslot from the Base Site and MM.
Exit the GLI MMI session and HyperTerminal connection by selecting File from the connection
window menu bar, and then Exit from the dropdown menu.
If no TCHs in groomed MCCs (or in whole SCCP shelf) can process calls, verify that the ISB
cabling is correct and that ISB A and ISB B cables are not swapped.
08/01/2001
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-35
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link – continued
Figure 6-5: MGLI/GLI Board MMI Connection Detail
STATUS LED
STATUS
RESET ALARM SPANS MASTER MMI ACTIVE
To MMI port
RESET
Pushbutton
ALARM LED
SPANS LED
MASTER LED
MMI Port
Connector
ACTIVE LED
8–PIN
NULL MODEM
BOARD
(TRN9666A)
8–PIN TO 10–PIN
RS–232 CABLE (P/N
30–09786R01)
CDMA LMF
COMPUTER
RS–232 CABLE
COM1
OR
COM2
DB9–TO–DB25
ADAPTER
Set BTS Site Span
Configuration
IMPORTANT
6-36
Perform the following procedure ONLY if span
configurations loaded in the MGLI2/GLI2s do not match
those in the OMCR/CBSC data base, AND ONLY when the
exact configuration data is available. Loading incorrect
span configuration data will render the site inoperable.
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
08/01/2001
PRELIMINARY
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link – continued
Table 6-30: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration
n Step
Action
If not previously done, connect the CDMA LMF computer to the MMI port on the applicable
MGLI2/GLI2 as shown in Figure 6-5.
If there is no MMI communication session in progress with the applicable MGLI2/GLI2, initiate
one by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (refer to Table 3-11).
At the GLI2> prompt, enter:
config ni format
Source Exif Data: 
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : No
Create Date                     : 2001:08:02 14:09:50
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 4.0 for Windows
Modify Date                     : 2001:08:02 14:23:42-05:00
Page Count                      : 362
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools
FCC ID Filing: IHET6ER1

Navigation menu